Sheet Conic Section B

Conic Section
Everything should be made as simple as possible, but not simpler...... Einstein, Albert
Our notion of symmetry is derived from the human face. Hence, we demand symmetry horizontally and in breadth only, not vertically nor in
depth .......... Pascal, Blaise
Form henceforth, space by itself, and time by itself, have vanished into the merest shadows and only a kind of blend of the two exists in its
own right...........Minkowski, Herman
This chapter focusses on parabolic curves, which constitutes one category of various curves obtained
by slicing a cone by a plane, called conic sections. A cone (not necessarily right circular) can be out
in various ways by a plane, and thus different types of conic sections are obtained.
Let us start with the definition of a conic section and then we will see how are they obtained by slicing
a right circular cone.
Conic Sections :
A conic section, or conic is the locus of a point which moves in a plane so that its distance from a fixed
point is in a constant ratio to its perpendicular distance from a fixed straight line.
• The fixed point is called the Focus.
• The fixed straight line is called the Directrix.
• The constant ratio is called the Eccentricity denoted by e.
PS
e
PM
• The line passing through the focus & perpendicular to the directrix is called the Axis.
• A point of intersection of a conic with its axis is called a Vertex.
If S is (p, q) & directrix is x + my + n = 0
| x  my  n |
then PS = ( x –  )2  ( y – )2 & PM =
 2  m2
PS
=e  (2 + m2) [(x – p)2 + (y – q)2] = e2 (x + my + n)2
PM
Which is of the form ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
Section of right circular cone by different planes :
A right circular cone is as shown in the figure – 1
A
Vertex
or
r at
ne
axis
Ge
B
Circular Base
Figure 1
Corporate Office: CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029 MAINCS - 1
Conic Section
(i) Section of a right circular cone by a plane passing through its vertex is a pair of straight lines passing
through the vertex as shown in the figure - 2.
Q
Figure –2
(ii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel to its base is a circle as shown in the figure  3.
(iii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel to a generator of the cone is a parabola as shown in
the figure–4.
Figure-4
(iv) Section of a right circular cone by a plane neither parallel to any generator of the cone nor perpendicular
or parallel to the axis of the cone is an ellipse or hyperbola as shown in the figure  5 & 6.
Figure -5 Figure -6
Conic Section
3D View :
Distinguishing various conics :

The nature of the conic section depends upon the position of the focus S w.r.t. the directrix & also upon
the value of the eccentricity e. Two different cases arise.
Case (I) When The Focus Lies On The Directrix.
In this case   abc + 2fgh  af 2  bg2  ch2 = 0 & the general equation of a conic represents a pair of
straight lines if:
e > 1  h2 > ab the lines will be real & distinct intersecting at S.
e = 1  h2 > ab the lines will coincident.
e < 1  h2 < ab the lines will be imaginary.
Case (II) When The Focus Does Not Lie On Directrix.
a parabola an ellipse a hyperbola rectangular hyperbola
e = 1;   0, 0 < e < 1;   0; e > 1;   0; e > 1;   0
h² = ab h² < ab h² > ab h² > ab; a + b = 0
PARABOLA
Definition and terminology : Y
A parabola is the locus of a point, whose distance M P

from a fixed point (focus) is equal to perpendicular
distance from a fixed straight line (directrix). L
Four standard forms of the parabola are
N
y² = 4ax; y² =  4ax; x² = 4ay; x² =  4ay Z A X
S
For parabola y2 = 4ax:
(i) Vertex is (0, 0) (ii) focus is (a, 0) L'
(iii) Axis is y = 0 (iv) Directrix is x + a = 0
P'
Focal Distance: The distance of a point on the parabola from the focus. 2
y = 4ax
Focal Chord : A chord of the parabola, which passes through the focus.
Double Ordinate: A chord of the parabola perpendicular to the axis of the symmetry.
Latus Rectum: A double ordinate passing through the focus or a focal chord perpendicular to the axis
of parabola is called the Latus Rectum (L.R.).
For y² = 4ax.  Length of the latus rectum = 4a.
 ends of the latus rectum are L(a, 2a) & L’ (a,  2a).
NOTE :
(i) Perpendicular distance from focus on directrix = half the latus rectum.
(ii) Vertex is middle point of the focus & the point of intersection of directrix & axis.
(iii) Two parabolas are said to be equal if they have the same latus rectum.
Conic Section
Example # 1: Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is at (– 1, – 2) and the directrix is
x – 2y + 3 = 0.
Solution : Let P(x, y) be any point on the parabola whose focus is S(– 1, – 2) and the directrix
x – 2y + 3 = 0. Draw PM perpendicular to directrix x – 2y + 3 = 0. Then by definition,
SP = PM
 SP2 = PM2
2
 x  2y  3 
 (x + 1)2 + (y + 2)2 =  
 1 4 
 5 [(x + 1)2 + (y + 2)2] = (x – 2y + 3) 2
 5(x 2 + y2 + 2x + 4y + 5) = (x 2 + 4y2 + 9 – 4xy + 6x – 12y)
 4x 2 + y2 + 4xy + 4x + 32y + 16 = 0
This is the equation of the required parabola.
Example # 2 : Find the vertex, axis, focus, directrix, latusrectum of the parabola, also draw their rough
sketches. 4y2 + 12x – 20y + 67 = 0
Solution : The given equation is
67
4y2 + 12x – 20y + 67 = 0  y2 + 3x – 5y + =0
4
2 2
67 5 67 5
 y2 – 5y = – 3x –  y2 – 5y +   = – 3x – +  
4 2 4 2
2 2
 5 42  5  7
  y   = – 3x –  y   = – 3x   ....(i)
 2 4  2  2
7 5
Let x=X– ,y=Y+ ....(ii)
2 2
Using these relations, equation (i) reduces to
Y2 = – 3X ....(iii)
This is of the form Y 2 = – 4aX. On comparing, we get 4a = 3
 a = 3/4.
Vertex - The coordinates of the vertex are (X = 0, Y = 0)
So, the coordinates of the vertex are
 7 5
 ,  [Putting X = 0, Y = 0 in (ii)]
 2 2
Axis
The equation of the axis of the parabola is Y = 0.
So, the equation of the axis is
5
y= [Putting Y = 0 in (ii)]
2
Focus-
The coordinates of the focus are (X = –a, Y = 0)
i.e. (X = – 3/4, Y = 0).
So, the coordinates of the focus are
(–17/4, 5/2) [Putting X = 3/4 in (ii)]
Directrix -
3
The equation of the directrix is X = a i.e. X = .
4
So, the equation of the directrix is
11
x=– [Putting X = 3/4 in (ii)]
4
Latusrectum -
The length of the latusrectum of the given parabola is 4a = 3.
Conic Section
Self Practice Problems :
(1) Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (0, 0)and whose directrix is the
straight line 3x – 4y + 2 = 0.
(2) Find the extremities of latus rectum of the parabola y = x2 – 2x + 3.
(3) Find the latus rectum & equation of parabola whose vertex is origin & directrix is x + y = 2.
(4) Find the vertex, axis, focus, directrix, latusrectum of the parabola y 2 – 8y – x + 19 = 0. Also
draw their roguht sketches.
(5) Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is (1, – 1) and whose vertex is (2, 1). Also find
its axis and latusrectum.
1 9 3 9
Ans. (1) 16x 2 + 9y2 + 24xy – 12x + 16y – 4 = 0 (2)  ,   , 
 2 4  2 4
(3) 4 2 , x2 + y2 – 2xy + 8x + 8y = 0
(4)
(5) (2x – y – 3) 2 = – 20 (x + 2y – 4), Axis 2x – y – 3 = 0. LL = 4 5 .
Parametric representation:
The simplest & the best form of representing the coordinates of a point on the parabola is (at², 2at)
i.e. the equations x = at² & y = 2at together represents the parabola y² = 4ax, t being the parameter.
Parametric form for : y2 = – 4ax (–at2, 2at)
x2 = 4ay (2at , at2)
2
x = – 4ay (2at , – at2)
Example # 3 : Find the parametric equation of the parabola (x – 1)2 = –16 (y – 2)
Solution :  4a = – 16  a = – 4, y – 2 = at2
x – 1 = 2 at  x = 1 – 8t, y = 2 – 4t2
(6) Find the parametric equation of the parabola x2 = 4ay
Ans. x = 2at, y = at2.
Position of a point relative to a parabola :

The point (x 1 , y1) lies outside, on or inside the parabola y² = 4ax according as the expression y 1²  4ax 1
is positive, zero or negative. Outside
S1 : y12 – 4ax1 Inside

S1 < 0  Inside
P(x1, y1)
S1 > 0  Outside
Example # 4 : Check whether the point (3, 4) lies inside or outside the paabola y 2 = 4x.
Solution : y2 – 4x = 0
 S1 y12 – 4x 1 = 16 – 12 = 4 > 0
 (3, 4) lies outside the parabola.
Conic Section
(7) Find the set of value's of for which (, – 2 – ) lies inside the parabola y 2 + 4x = 0.
Ans.   (– 4 – 2 3 , – 4 + 2 3 )
Line & a parabola :

The line y = mx + c meets the parabola y² = 4ax in two points real, Tangent
Secant
coincident or imaginary according as a  cm 
A
 condition of tangency is, c = a/m.
Length of the chord intercepted by the parabola
on the line y = m x + c is : B
 4 
 2 a(1  m 2 )(a  mc ) .
m 
NOTE :
1. The equation of a chord joining t 1 & t 2 is 2x  (t 1 + t 2) y + 2 at 1 t 2 = 0.
2. If t 1 & t 2 are the ends of a focal chord of the parabola y² = 4ax then t 1t 2 = 1. Hence the
coordinates at the extremities of a focal chord can be taken as (at², 2at) & 
 a 2a 
2
, 
t t 
Focal chord
A
S (focus)
B
3. Length of the focal chord making an angle  with the x axis is 4acosec² 
Example # 5 : Discuss the position of line y = x + 1 with respect to parabola y 2 = 4x.

Solution : Solving we get (x + 1) 2 = 4x  (x – 1)2 = 0
so y = x + 1 is tangent to the parabola.
Example # 6 : Prove that focal distance of a point P(at 2, 2at) on parabola y2 = 4ax (a > 0) is a(1 + t 2).
Solution :
 PS = PM = a + at 2  PS = a (1 + t 2).
Example # 7 : If the endpoint t1, t2 of a chord of the parabola y2 = x satisfy the relation t1 t2 = 8 then prove that the
chord always passes through a fixed point. Find the point?
1 2 1  1 2 1 
Solution : Equation of chord joining  t 1 , t1  and  t 2 , t 2  is
4 2  4 2 
1 2  1 2 1 2 1 1
y– t1 = t  t  x  t 1   (t1 + t2) y – t – t1t2 = 2x – t12
2 1 2  4  2 1 2 2
2
y = t  t (x + 2) ( t1t2 = 8)
1 2
 This line passes through a fixed point (– 2, 0).
Conic Section
(8) If the line y = 3x + intersect the parabola y 2 = 4x at two distinct point's then set of value's of
'' is
(9) Find the midpoint of the chord x + y = 2 of the parabola y2 = 4x.
(10) If one end of focal chord of parabola y 2 = 16x is (16, 16) then coordinate of other end is.
(11) If PSQ is focal chord of parabola y 2 = 4ax (a > 0), where S is focus then prove that
1 1 1
+ = .
PS SQ a
(12) Find the length of focal chord whose one end point is ‘t’.
2
 1
Ans. (8) (– , 1/3) (9) (4, – 2) (10) (1, – 4) (12) a t  
 t
Tangents to the parabola y² = 4ax :

Equation of tangent at a point on the parabola can be obtained by replacement method or using derivatives.
In replacement method, following changes are made to the second degree equation to obtain T.
x2  x x1, y2  y y1, 2xy  xy1 + x1y, 2x  x + x1, 2y  y + y1
So, it follows that the targents are :
(i) y y1 = 2 a (x + x 1) at the point (x 1, y1) ;

a  a 2a 
(ii) y = mx + (m  0) at  2 , m 
m m 
(iii) t y = x + a t² at (at², 2at).
Note : Point of intersection of the tangents at the point t 1 & t 2 is { at 1 t 2 , a(t 1 + t 2) }.
a
Example # 8 : Prove that the straight line y = mx + c touches the parabola y 2 = 4a (x + a) if c = ma +
m
Solution : Equation of tangent of slope ‘m’ to the parabola y 2 = 4a(x + a) is

a  1
y = m(x + a) +  y = mx + a  m  
m  m
but the given tangent is y = mx +c
a
 c = am +
m
Example # 9 : A tangent to the parabola y 2 = 8x makes an angle of 45° with the straight line y = 3x + 5. Find
its equation and its point of contact.
3 1
Solution : Slope of required tangent’s are m =
1 3
1
m 1 = – 2, m2 =
2
a
 Equation of tangent of slope m to the parabola y 2 = 4ax is y = mx + .
m
1 
 tangent’s y = – 2x – 1 at  ,  2 
2 
1
y= x + 4 at (8, 8)
2
Conic Section
Example # 10 : Find the equation to the tangents to the parabola y 2 = 9x which goes through the point (4, 10).
9
Solution : Equation of tangent to parabola y 2 = 9x is y = mx +
4m
Since it passes through (4, 10)
9 1 9
 10 = 4m +  16 m 2 – 40 m + 9 = 0  m= ,
4m 4 4
x 9
 equation of tangent’s are y= +9 & y= x + 1.
4 4
Example # 11 : Find the equations to the common tangents of the parabolas y 2 = 4ax and x 2 = 4by.
Solution : Equation of tangent to y 2 = 4ax is
a
y = mx + ........(i)
m
Equation of tangent to x 2 = 4by is
b 1 b
x = m 1y +  y= x– ........(ii)
m1 m1 (m1 ) 2
for common tangent, (i) & (ii) must represent same line.
1 a b
 m1
=m & = – 2
m m1
1/ 3
a  a
 = – bm 2  m =  
m  b
1/ 3 1/ 3
 a  b
 equation of common tangent is y =    x + a  
 b  a
(13) Find equation tangent to parabola y2 = 4x whose intercept on y–axis is 2.
(14) Prove that perpendicular drawn from focus upon any tangent of a parabola lies on the tangent at the
vertex.
(15) Prove that image of focus in any tangent to parabola lies on its directrix.
(16) Prove that the area of triangle formed by three tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax is half the area of
triangle formed by their points of contacts.
x
Ans. (13) y 2
2
Normals to the parabola y² = 4ax :
Normal is obtained using the slope of tangent.
2a P
Slope of tangent at (x1 , y1) =
y1 Normal
y1
 Slope of normal = –
2a
y1
(i) y  y1 = – (x  x 1) at (x 1, y1) ;
2a
(ii) y = mx  2am  am 3 at (am 2,  2am)
(iii) y + tx = 2at + at 3 at (at 2, 2at).
Conic Section
NOTE :
(i) Point of intersection of normals at t 1 & t 2 is (a (t 12 + t 22 + t 1t 2 + 2),  a t 1 t 2 (t 1 + t 2)).
(ii) If the normals to the parabola y² = 4ax at the point t 1, meets the parabola again at the point
 2
t 2, then t 2 = –  t 1   .
 t1 
P(t1)
Q(t2)
(iii) If the normals to the parabola y² = 4ax at the points t 1 & t 2 intersect again on the parabola at the
point 't 3' then t 1 t 2 = 2; t 3 =  (t 1 + t 2) and the line joining t 1 & t 2 passes through a fixed point
(2a, 0).
(iv) If normal are drawn from a point P(h, k) to the parabola y 2 = 4ax then
k = mh  2am  am 3 i.e. am 3 + m(2a  h) + k = 0.
2a  h k
m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 ; m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 = ; m 1 m2 m3 =  .
a a
Where m 1, m 2, & m 3 are the slopes of the three concurrent normals. Note that
A
P(h, k)
A, B, C  Conormal points
B
C
 algebraic sum of the slopes of the three concurrent normals is zero.

 algebraic sum of the ordinates of the three conormal points on the parabola is zero
 Centroid of the  formed by three conormal points lies on the xaxis.
Example # 12 : Find the locus of the point N from which 3 normals are drawn to the parabola y2 = 4ax are such that
(i) Two of them are equally inclined to x-axis
(ii) Two of them are perpendicular to each other
Solution : Equation of normal to y2 = 4ax is
y = mx – 2am – am3
Let the normal passes through N(h, k)
 k = mh – 2am – am3  am3 + (2a – h) m + k = 0
For given value’s of (h, k) it is cubic in ‘m’.
Let m1, m2 & m3 are root’s of above equation
 m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 ......(i)
2a  h
m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 = ......(ii)
a
k
m1m2m3 = – ......(iii)
a
(i) If two normal are equally inclined to x-axis, then m1 + m2 = 0
 m3 = 0  y=0
Conic Section
(ii) If two normal’s are perpendicular
 m1 m2 = – 1
k
from (3) m3 = .....(iv)
a
k 2a  h
from (2) –1+ (m1 + m2) = .....(v)
a a
k
from (1) m1 + m2 = – .....(vi)
a
from (5) & (6), we get
k2 h
–1– =2–
a a
y2 = a(x – 3a)
(17) Find the points of the parabola y 2 = 4ax at which the normal is inclined at 30° to the axis.
(18) If the normal at point P(1, 2) on the parabola y2 = 4x cuts it again at point Q then Q = ?
(19) Find the length of normal chord at point ‘t’ to the parabola y2 = 4ax.
(20) If normal chord at a point 't' on the parabola y 2 = 4ax subtends a right angle at the vertex then
prove that t 2 = 2
(21) Prove that the chord of the parabola y 2 = 4ax, whose equation is y – x 2 + 4a 2 = 0, is a
normal to the curve and that its length is 6 3a .
(22) If the normals at 3 points P, Q & R are concurrent, then show that
(i) The sum of slopes of normals is zero, (ii) Sum of ordinates of points P, Q, R is zero
(iii) The centroid of PQR lies on the axis of parabola.
3
a 2a   a 2a  4a(t 2  1) 2
Ans. (17)  , ,  ,  (18) (9, – 6) (19) 
3   
 3  3 3  t2
Pair of tangents:
The equation to the pair of tangents which can be drawn from any point (x 1, y1) to the parabola y² = 4ax
is given by: SS1 = T² where :
S  y²  4ax ; S1 = y1²  4ax 1 ; T  y y1  2a(x + x 1).
A
(x1, y1) P
B
Example # 13 : Write the equation of pair of tangents to the parabola y2 = 4x drawn from a point P(–1, 2)
Solution : We know the equation of pair of tangents are given by SS1 = T²
 (y2 – 4x) (4 + 4) = (2y – 2 (x – 1))2
 8y2 – 32x = 4y2 + 4x2 + 4 – 8xy + 8y – 8x
 y2 – x2 + 2xy – 6x – 2y = 1
Conic Section
Example # 14 :Find the directrix of parabola such that from point P tangents are drawn to parabola y2 = 4ax
having slopes m1, m2 such that m1 m2 = –2
Solution : Equation of tangent to y2 = 4ax, is
a
y = mx +
m
Let it passes through P(h, k)
 m2h – mk + a = 0
m1 m2 = –2  a = –2
so directrix is x = 2
(23) If two tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax from a point P make angles 1 and 2 with the axis of the
parabola, then find the locus of P in each of the following cases.
(i) tan21 + tan22 =  (a constant) (ii) cos 1 cos 2 =  (a constant)
Ans. (i) y2 – 2ax = x2 , (ii) x2 = 2 {(x – a)2 + y2}
Director circle :
Locus of the point of intersection of the perpendicular tangents to a curve is called the Director Circle.
For parabola y 2 = 4ax it’s equation is x + a = 0 which is parabola’s own directrix.
Chord of contact :
Equation to the chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point P(x 1, y1) is yy1 = 2a (x + x 1).
A
P
(x1, y1) Chord of contact
NOTE : The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the point (x 1, y1) & the chord of contact is
1
(y1²  4ax 1)3/2
2a
Example # 15 : If the line x – y – 5 = 0 intersect the parabola y2 = 8x at P & Q, then find the point of intersection of
tangents at P & Q.
Solution : Let (h, k) be point of intersection of tangents then chord of contact is
yk = 4(x + h)
4x – yk + 4h = 0 .....(i)
But given is x – y – 5 = 0
3 k 4h
 = =  h = – 5, k = 4  point (–5, 4)
2 1  5

(24) Prove that locus of a point whose chord of contact w.r.t. parabola passes through focus is directrix
(25) If from a variable point ‘P’ on the line x – 2y + 1 = 0 pair of tangent’s are drawn to the parabola
y2 = 8x then prove that chord of contact passes through a fixed point, also find that point.
Ans. (25) (1, 8)
Chord with a given middle point :
Equation of the chord of the parabola y² = 4ax whose middle point is

M(x,y)
2a
(x 1, y1) is y  y1 = (x  x 1)  T = S1
y1
Conic Section
Example # 16 : Find the locus of middle point of the chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax which pass through a given point
(p, q).
Solution : Let P(h, k) be the mid point of chord of parabola y2 = 4ax,
so equation of chord is yk – 2a(x + h) = k2 – 4ah.
Since it passes through (p, q)
 qk – 2a (p + h) = k2 – 4ah
 Required locus is
y2 – 2ax – qy + 2ap = 0.
Example # 17 : Find the locus of middle point of the chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax which are parallel to the line
x +2y = 0
Solution : Let P(h, k) be the mid point of chord of parabola y2 = 4ax,
so equation of chord is yk – 2a(x + h) = k2 – 4ah.
2a k 2a
but slope = =m =
k 2 1
 locus is k = –4a y = 4a
(26) Find the equation of chord of parabola y2 = 4x whose mid point is (4, 2).
(27) Find the locus of mid - point of chord of parabola y2 = 4ax which touches the parabola x2 = 4by.
Ans. (26) x–y–2=0 (27) y (2ax – y2) = 4a2b
Important Highlights :
(i) If the tangent & normal at any point ‘P’ of the parabola intersect the axis at T & G then
ST = SG = SP where ‘S’ is the focus. In other words the tangent and the normal at a point P on
the parabola are the bisectors of the angle between the focal radius SP & the perpendicular
from P on the directrix. From this we conclude that all rays emanating from S will become
parallel to the axis of theparabola after reflection.
(ii) The portion of a tangent to a parabola cut off between the directrix & the curve subtends a right
angle at the focus.
See figure above.
(iii) The tangents at the extremities of a focal chord intersect at right angles on the directrix, and
hence a circle on any focal chord as diameter touches the directrix. Also a circle on any focal
radii of a point P (at 2, 2at) as diameter touches the tangent at the vertex.
R
S A
O
Conic Section
(iv) Any tangent to a parabola & the perpendicular on it from the
focus meet on the tangent at the vertex.
y
P
R
x
O S
(v) Semi latus rectum of the parabola y² = 4ax, is the harmonic mean between segments of any
focal chord of the parabola.
P
S 2(PS )(SQ )
= 2a
Q PS  SQ
(vi) The area of the triangle formed by three points on a parabola is twice the area of the triangle
formed by the tangents at these points.
ELLIPSE
In this chapter we are going to discuss in detail the nature of path in which on planets move around the sun.
They follow on elliptical path with the sun at one of its foci. Let us look at the definition of ellipse.
Definitions : -
It is locus of a point which moves in such a way that the ratio of its distance from a fixed point and a
fixed line (not passes through fixed point and all points and line lies in same plane) is constant (e),
which is less than one.
The fixed point is called - focus
The fixed line is called -directrix.
The constant ratio is called - eccentricity, it is denoted by 'e'.
Example # 18 : Find the equation to the ellipse whose focus is the point (– 1, 1), whose directrix is the straight
1
line x – y + 3 = 0 and eccentricity is .
2
PS 1
Solution : Let P  (h, k) be moving point, e = =
PM 2
2
h k  3
1
 (h + 1)2 + (k – 1)2 =  
4 2 
 locus of P(h, k) is 8 {x 2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 2} = (x 2 + y2 – 2xy + 6x – 6y + 9)
7x 2 + 7y2 + 2xy + 10x – 10 y + 7 = 0.
Note : The general equation of a conic with focus (p, q) & directrix x + my + n = 0 is:
(2 + m 2) [(x  p)2 + (y  q)2] = e2 (x + my + n)2  ax 2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
represent ellipse if 0 < e < 1;   0, h² < ab

1
(28) Find the equation to the ellipse whose focus is (0, 0) directrix is x + y – 1 = 0 and e = .
2
Ans. 3x 2 + 3y2 – 2xy + 2x + 2y – 1 = 0.
Conic Section
Standar d Equation
Standard equation of an ellipse referred
to its principal axes along the coordinate
x2 y2
axes is  = 1,
a2 b2
where a > b & b² = a² (1  e²).
b2
Eccentricity: e = 1  , (0 < e < 1)
a2
Focii : S  (a e, 0) & S ( a e, 0).
a a
Equations of Directrices : x = &x= .
e e
Major Axis : The line segment AA in which the focii S & S lie is of length 2a & is called the major axis
(a > b) of the ellipse. Point of intersection of major axis with directrix is called the foot of the directrix
(Z).
Minor Axis : The yaxis intersects the ellipse in the points B  (0,  b) & B  (0, b). The line segment
BB is of length 2b (b < a) is called the minor axis of the ellipse.
Principal Axis : The major & minor axes together are called principal axis of the ellipse.
Vertices : Point of intersection of ellipse with major axis. A ( a, 0) & A  (a, 0) .
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the major axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum : The focal chord perpendicular to the major axis is called the latus rectum.
2b 2 minor axis2
Length of latus rectum (LL) =
a

major axis
 2a 1 e 2  
= 2 e (distance from focus to the corresponding directrix)
Centre : The point which bisects every chord of the conic drawn through it, is called the centre of the
2 y2
conic. C  (0, 0) the origin is the centre of the ellipse x2  2 = 1.
a b
2 y2
Note : (i) If the equation of the ellipse is given as x2  2 = 1 and nothing is mentioned, then the rule is
a b
to assume that a > b.
(ii) If b > a is given, then the yaxis will become major axis and x-axis will become the minor axis
and all other points and lines will change accordingly.
x2 y2
Equation : 2 + =1
a b2
b
Foci (0, be) Directrices : y = 
e
a2
a2 = b2 (1 – e2), a < b.  e= 1–
b2
Vertices (0, b) ; L.R. y = be
2a 2
 (L·R.) = , centre : (0, 0)
b
Conic Section
Example # 19 : Find the equation to the ellipse whose centre is origin, axes are the axes of co-ordinate and
passes through the points (2, 2) and (3, 1).
x2 y2
Solution : Let the equation to the ellipse is =1 +
a2 b2
Since it passes through the points (2, 2) and (3, 1)
4 4
 2 + =1 ..........(i)
a b2
9 1
and 2 +
=1 .........(ii)
a b2
from (i) – 4 (ii), we get
4  36 32
2 = 1– 4  a2 =
a 3
from (i), we get
1 1 3 83 32
= – =  b2 =
b2 4 32 32 5
 Ellipse is 3x 2 + 5y2 = 32
1
Example # 20 : Find the equation of the ellipse whose focii are (4, 0) and (– 4, 0) and eccentricity is
3
Solution : Since both focus lies on x-axis, therefore x-axis is major axis and mid point of focii is origin
which is centre and a line perpendicular to major axis and passes through centre is minor axis
which is y-axis.
x2 y2
Let equation of ellipse is + =1
a2 b2
1
 ae = 4 and e= (Given)
3
 a = 12 and b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
 1
 b2 = 144  1    b2 = 16 × 8  b=8 2
 9 
x2 y2
Equation of ellipse is + =1
144 128
Example # 21 : If lenght of latus rectum is equal to half of semi major axis then find the eccentricity of ellipse
x2 y2
Solution : Let the equation of ellipse is + =1 (a > b)
a2 b2
2b2 a b2 1 b2 3
=  2 = e= 1 2 =
a 2 a 4 a 2
Example # 22 : Find the equation of axes, directrix, co-ordinate of focii, centre, vertices, length of latus -
(x  2)2 (y  4)2
rectum and eccentricity of an ellipse + = 1.
25 16
X2 Y2
Solution : Let x – 2 = X, y – 4 = Y, so equation of ellipse becomes as + = 1.
52 42
equation of major axis is Y = 0  y = 4.
equation of minor axis is X = 0  x = 2.
centre (X = 0, Y = 0)  x = 2, y = 4
C  (2, 4)
Length of semi-major axis a = 5
Conic Section
Length of major axis 2a = 10
Length of semi-minor axis b = 4
Length of minor axis = 2b = 8.
Let 'e' be eccentricity
 b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
a2  b2 25  16 3
e= = = .
a2 25 5
2b 2 2  16 32
Length of latus rectum = LL = = =
a 5 5
Co-ordinates focii are X = ± ae, Y = 0
 S  (X = 3, Y = 0) & S (X = –3, Y = 0)
 S  (5, 4) & S (–1, 4)
Co-ordinate of vertices
Extremities of major axis A  (X = a, Y = 0) & A (X = – a, Y = 0)
 A  (x = 7, y = 4) & A = (x = – 3, y = 4)
A  (7, 4) & A (– 3, 4)
Extremities of minor axis B (X = 0, Y = b) & B  (X = 0, Y = – b)
B (x = 2, y = 8) & B (x = 2, y = – 0)
B  (2, 8) & B (2, 0)
a
Equation of directrix X = ±
e
25 31 19
x–2=±  x= & x=–
3 3 3
(29) Find the equation to the ellipse whose axes are of lengths 6 and 2 6 and their equations are
x – 3y + 3 = 0 and 3x + y – 1 = 0 respectively.
(30) Find the eccentricity of ellipse whose minor axis is double the latus rectum.
(31) Find the co-ordinates of the focii of the ellipse 4x 2 + 9y2 = 1.
x2 y2 1
(32) Find the standard ellipse + = 1 passing through (2, 1) and having eccentricity .
a2 b2 2
Ans. (29) 3(x – 3y + 3) 2 + 2(3x+ y – 1) 2 = 180,
21x 2 – 6xy + 29y 2 + 6x – 58y – 151 = 0.
 
(30)
3
(31)   5 , 0 (32) 3x 2 + 4y2 = 16
2  6 
 
Auxiliary Circle / Eccentric Angle :
A circle described on major axis of ellipse as diameter is called the auxiliary circle.
Let Q be a point on the auxiliary circle x² + y² = a² such that line through Q perpendicular to the x  axis
on the way intersects the ellipse at P, then P & Q are called as the Corresponding Points on the
ellipse & the auxiliary circle respectively. ‘’ is called the Eccentric Angle of the point P on the ellipse
( < ).
Q  (a cos , a sin)
P  (a cos , b sin)
Conic Section
Focal property : summation of distance of any point from two focus is equal to lenght of major axis
Proof : Let 'e' be the eccentricity of ellipse.
 PS = e . PM
a 
= e   a cos  
e 
PS = (a – a e cos)
and PS = e. PM
 a
= e  a cos   
 e
PS = a + ae cos
 focal distance are (a ± ae cos)
PS + PS = 2a, PS + PS = AA= lenght of major axis
x2 y2
(33) Find the distance from centre of the point P on the ellipse 2 + = 1 whose eccentric
a b2
angle is 
x2 y2
(34) Find the eccentric angle of a point on the ellipse + = 1 whose distance from the
6 2
centre is 2.
 3
Ans. (33) r  a 2 cos 2   b 2 sin 2  (34) ± ,±
4 4
Parametric Representation :
2 y2
The equations x = a cos  & y = b sin  together represent the ellipse x 2  2 = 1.
a b
Where  is a parameter. Note that if P()  (a cos  b sin ) is on the ellipse then;
Q()  (a cos  a sin ) is on the auxiliary circle.
The equation to the chord of the ellipse joining two points with eccentric angles  &  is given by
x  y  
cos  sin  cos .
a 2 b 2 2
x2 y2    5 
Example # 23 : Write the equation of chord of an ellipse + =1 joining two points P   and Q  .
25 16 4  4 
  5    5    5 
        
x  4 4  y 4 4  4 4 
Solution : Equation of chord is cos + . sin  = cos 
5 2 4 2 2
x  3  y  3  x y
. cos   + . sin   =0  – + =0  4x = 5y
5  4  4  4  5 4

(35) Show that the sum of squares of reciprocals of two perpendicular diameters of the ellipse
x2 y2
+ = 1 is constant. Find the constant also.
a2 b2
1 1 1 
Ans.  2  2
4a b 
Conic Section
Position of a Point w.r.t. an Ellipse :
x12 y12
The point P(x 1, y1) lies outside, inside or on the ellipse according as ;   1 > < or = 0.
a2 b2
x2 y2
Example # 24 : Check whether the point P(5, 4) lies inside or outside of the ellipse + = 1.
25 16
25 16
Solution : S1  + –1=1+1–1>0
25 16
 Point P  (5, 4) lies outside the ellipse.
Line and an Ellipse :
x2 y2
The line y = mx + c meets the ellipse + = 1 in two points real, coincident or imaginary
a2 b2
according as c² is < = or > a²m² + b².
2 y2
Hence y = mx + c is tangent to the ellipse x2  2 = 1 if c² = a²m² + b².
a b
Example # 25 : Find the set of value(s) of '' for which the line 3x – 4y +  = 0 lies outside the ellipse
x2 y2
+ = 1.
16 9
( 4y   ) 2 y2
Solution : Solving given line with ellipse, we get + =1
9  16 9
2y 2 y 2
– + –1 = 0
9 18 144
Since, line intersect the parabola at two distinct points,
 roots of above equation are real & distinct
 D0
2 8  2 
 – .  144  1 < 0    (–, –12 2 )  (12 2 , )
(18)2 9  
x2 y2
(36) Find the value of '' for which 2x – y +  = 0 touches the ellipse + =1
25 9
Ans. =± 109
Tangents :
2 2 2
x2 y2
(a) Slope form: y = mx ± a m b is tangent to the ellipse + = 1 for all values of m.
a2 b2
xx1 yy1 x2 y2
(b) Point form :   1 is tangent to the ellipse + = 1 at (x 1, y1).
a2 b2 a2 b2
xcos ysin x2 y2
(c) Parametric form:   1 is tangent to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 at the point
a b a b
(a cos , b sin ).
Note : (i) There are two tangents to the ellipse having the same m, i.e. there are two tangents parallel to
any given direction.These tangents touches the ellipse at extremities of a diameter.
 cos   
sin 2 
(ii) 
Point of intersection of the tangents at the point  &  is, a 2
,b
 cos   cos  2  
 2
(iii) The eccentric angles of the points of contact of two parallel tangents differ by .
Conic Section
Example # 26 : Find the equations of the tangents to the ellipse 3x 2 + 4y2 = 12 which are perpendicular to the
line x + y = 3.
Solution : Slope of tangent = m = 1
x2 y2
Given ellipse is + =1
4 3
Equation of tangent whose slope is 'm' is y = mx ± 4m 2  3

 m=1  y=x± 7
x2 y2
Example # 27 : A tangent to the ellipse +
= 1 meets the co-ordinate axes at A and B respectively. If P
2
a b2
divides AB in the ratio 3 : 1, then find the locus of point P.
Solution : Let P  ( a cos, b sin)
 equation of tangent is
x y
cos + sin = 1
a b
A  (a sec, 0)
B  (0, b cosec)
 P divide AB internally in the ratio 3 : 1
a 3a
h= :k=
4 cos  4 sin 
a 3a
 cos = sin =
4h 4k
a2 9a 2
then the locus is  =1
16 x 2 16 y 2
(37) Show that the locus of the point of intersection of the tangents at the extremities of any focal
chord of an ellipse is the directrix corresponding to the focus.
(38) Show that the locus of the foot of the perpendicular on a varying tangent to an ellipse from
either of its foci is a concentric circle.
(39) Prove that the portion of the tangent to an ellipse intercepted between the ellipse and the
directrix subtends a right angle at the corresponding focus.
(40) Find the area of parallelogram formed by tangents at the extremities of latera recta of the
x2 y2
ellipse   1.
a2 b2
2a 3
Ans. (40)
a2  b2
Normals :
x2 y2 a2 x b2 y
(i) Equation of the normal at (x 1, y1) to the ellipse + = 1 is  = a²  b².
a2 b2 x1 y1
x2 y2
(ii) Equation of the normal at the point (acos , bsin ) to the ellipse 2 + = 1 is;
a b2
.
ax. sec   by cosec  = (a²  b²).
(iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is y = mx 

a  b m
2 2
.
a 2  b 2m 2
Conic Section
x2 y2
Example # 28 : P and Q are corresponding points on the ellipse +
= 1 and the auxiliary circles
a2 b2
respectively. The normal at P to the ellipse meets CQ in R, where C is the centre of the ellipse.
Prove that CR = a + b
Solution : Let P  (acos , b sin)
 Q  (a cos, a sin)
Equation of normal at P is
(a sec) x – (b cosec ) y = a2 – b2 ..........(i)
equation of CQ is y = tan . x .........(ii)
Solving equation (i) & (ii), we get (a – b) x = (a 2 – b2) cos
x = (a + b) cos, & y = (a + b) sin
 R  ((a + b) cos, (a + b) sin)  CR = a + b
x2 y2
(41) Find the value(s) of 'k' for which the line x + y = k is a normal to the ellipse  1
a2 b2
Ans. k= 
a 2
 b2  2
a2  b2
Pair of Tangents :
The equation to the pair of tangents which can be drawn from any point (x 1, y1) to the ellipse
x2 y2
 = 1 is given by: SS 1 = T² where :
a2 b2
x2 y2 x12 y12 xx1 yy1

S  –1 ; S1 = 2
 2 –1; T 2 + –1
a2 b2 a b a b2
x2 y2
Example # 29 : How many real tangents can be drawn from the point (4, 3) to the ellipse + = 1. Find
16 9
the equation of these tangents & angle between them.
Solution : Given point P  (4, 3)
x2 y2
ellipse S  + –1=0
16 9
16 9
 S1  + –1=1>0  Point P  (4, 3) lies outside the ellipse.
16 9
 Two tangents can be drawn from the point P(4, 3).
Equation of pair of tangents is SS 1 = T 2
 x2 y2  4 x 3y 
2
x2 y2 x2 y2 xy 2y

   1 . 1 =    1  + –1= + +1+ –
x
–
 16 9  16 9 16 9 16 9 6 2 3
   
 – xy + 3x + 4y – 12 = 0  (4 – x) (y – 3) = 0  x=4&y=3

and angle between them =
2
Alternative
By direct observation
x = 4, y = 3 are tangents.
Conic Section
x2 y2
Example # 30 : Find the locus of point of intersection of perpendicular tangents to the ellipse 2
 =1
a b2
Solution : Let P(h, k) be the point of intersection of two perpendicular tangents
equation of pair of tangents is SS 1 = T 2
 x2 y2   h2 k 2  2
    1    1 =  hx  ky  1
 a2 b 2   a2 b2  2
b2
    a 
2  h2
x 2  k  1 y2 

 1 + ........ = 0
  2  +  a2  .........(i)
a2  b  b2  
Since equation (i) represents two perpendicular lines
1  k2  1  h2 
  1 +   1 = 0
  b2   a2 
a2   b2  
 k 2 – b2 + h2 – a2 = 0  locus is x 2 + y2 = a2 + b2
(42) Find the locus of point of intersection of the tangents drawn at the extremities of a focal chord
x2 y2
of the ellipse + = 1.
a2 b2
a
Ans. x=±
e
Director Circle :
Locus of the point of intersection of the tangents which meet at right angles is called the Director
Circle. The equation to this locus is x² + y² = a² + b² i.e. a circle whose centre is the centre of the
ellipse & whose radius is the length of the line joining the ends of the major & minor axes.
Example # 31 : An ellipse slides between two perpendicular lines. Show that the locus of its centre is a circle.
Solution : Let length of semi-major and semi-minor axis are 'a' and 'b' and centre is C  (h, k)
Since ellipse slides between two perpendicular lines, therefore point of intersection of two
perpendicular tangents lies on director circle.
Let us consider two perpendicular lines as x & y axes
 point of intersection is origin O  (0, 0)
 OC = radius of director circle
2 2
 h2  k 2 = a  b
 locus of C  (h, k) is  x 2 + y2 = a2 + b2 which is a circle
(43) A tangent to the ellipse x 2 + 4y2 = 4 meets the ellipse x 2 + 2y2 = 6 at P and Q. Prove that the
tangents at P and Q of the ellipse x 2 + 2y2 = 6 are at right angles.
Chord of Contact :
x2 y2
Equation to the chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point P(x 1, y1) to the ellipse + = 1 is
a2 b2
xx1 yy1
T = 0, where T= 2 + –1
a b2
Conic Section
(44) Find the locus of point of intersection of tangents at the extremities of normal chords of the
x2 y2
ellipse + = 1.
a2 b2
(45) Find the locus of point of intersection of tangents at the extremities of the chords of the
x2 y2
ellipse + = 1 subtending a right angle at its centre.
a2 b2
a6 b6 x2 y2 1 1
Ans. (44) + 2 = (a2 – b2)2 (45) + = 2 +
x 2 y a 4
b 4
a b2

2 y2
Equation of the chord of the ellipse x2  2 = 1 whose middle point is (x 1, y1) is T = S1,
a b
2 2
x1 y1 xx1 yy1
where S1 =  –1; T + – 1.
a2 b2 a 2
b2
x2 y2
(46) Find the equation of the chord + = 1 which is bisected at (2, 1).
36 9
Ans. x + 2y = 4
Important Highlights :
x2 y2
Refering to the ellipse  =1
a2 b2
(1) If P be any point on the ellipse with S & S as its foci then  (SP) +  (SP) = 2a.
(2) The tangent & normal at a point P on the ellipse bisect the
external & internal angles between the focal distances of P.
This refers to the well known reflection property of the ellipse
which states that rays from one focus are reflected through
other focus & viceversa. Hence we can deduce that the straight
lines joining each focus to the foot of the perpendicular from
the other focus upon the tangent at any point P meet on the
normal PG and bisects it where G is the point where normal at
P meets the major axis.
Conic Section
(3) The product of the length’s of the perpendicular segments from the foci on any tangent to the ellipse is
b² and the feet of these perpendiculars lie on its auxiliary circle.
(4) The portion of the tangent to an ellipse between the point of contact & the directrix subtends a right
angle at the corresponding focus.
(5) If the normal at any point P on the ellipse with centre C meet the major & minor axes in G & g
respectively, & if CF be perpendicular upon this normal , then
(i) PF. PG = b² (ii) PF. Pg = a²
(iii) locus of the mid point of Gg is another ellipse having
the same eccentricity as that of the original ellipse.
[where S and S are the focii of the ellipse]
(6) The circle on any focal distance as diameter touches the auxiliary circle.
HYPERBOLA
Hyperbolic curves are of special importance in the field of science
and technology especially astronomy and space studies. In this
chapter we are going to study the characteristics of such curves.
Definition : A hyperbola is defined as the locus of a point moving
in a plane in such a way that the ratio of its distance from a fixed
point to that from a fixed line (the point does not lie on the line) is
a fixed constant greater than 1.
PS
=e>1, e – eccentricity
PM
Standard equation & definition(s)
Conic Section
2 2
Standard equation of hyperbola is x  y  1 , where b2 = a2 (e2  1).
a2 b2
2
b
• Eccentricity (e) : e2 = 1 + 2
a
• Foci : S  (ae, 0) & S  ( ae, 0).
a a
• Equations of directrices : x = & x= .
e e
• Transverse axis : The line segment AA of length 2a in which the foci S & S both lie is called
the transverse axis of the hyperbola.
• Conjugate axis : The line segment BB of length 2b between the two points B (0,  b)
& B (0, b) is called as the conjugate axis of the hyperbola.
• Principal axes : The transverse & conjugate axis together are called principal axes of the
hyperbola.
• Vertices : A (a, 0) & A ( a, 0)
• Focal chord : A chord which passes through a focus is called a focal chord.
• Double ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the transverse axis is called a double ordinate.
• Latus rectum : Focal chord perpendicular to the transverse axis is called latus rectum.
Its length () is given by
2
2 b 2  C . A .
=  = 2a (e2  1)
a T . A.
Note : (i) Length of latus rectum = 2 e × (distance of focus from corresponding directrix)
2  2 
 b2   2
 ae,  b  , M 

  ae, b  , M    ae,  b 
(ii) End points of latus rectum are L   ae,  , L 
  
 a 


 a   a   a 
• Centre : The point which bisects every chord of the conic, drawn through it, is called the centre of the
x2 y2
conic. C  (0,0) the origin is the centre of the hyperbola   1.
a2 b2
General note : Since the fundamental equation to hyperbola only differs from that to ellipse in having
b2 instead of b2 it will be found that many propositions for hyperbola are derived from those
for ellipse by simply changing the sign of b 2.
Example # 32 : Find the equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is 3x + 4y = 2, focus (1, 2) and
eccentricity 3 .
Solution : Let P(x,y) be any point on the hyperbola.
Draw PM perpendicular from P on the directrix.
Then by definition SP = e PM
 (SP)2 = e2 (PM)2
2
2
 3x  4y  2 
2
 (x – 1) + (y – 2) = 3  
 5 
which is the required hyperbola.
Conic Section
Example # 33 : Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum is half of its transverse axis.
x2 y2
Solution : Let the equation of hyperbola be – =1
a2 b2
2b 2
Then transverse axis = 2a and latus–rectum =
a
2b 2 1
According to question = (2a)  2b2 = a2 ( b2 = a2 (e2 – 1))
a 2
 2a2 (e2 – 1) = a2  2e2 – 2 = 1
3 3
 e2 =  e=
2 2
3
Hence the required eccentricity is
2
Conjugate hyperbola :
Two hyperbolas such that transverse & conjugate axes of one hyperbola are respectively the conjugate
& the transverse axes of the other are called conjugate hyperbolas of each other.
x2 y2 x2 y2
eg.   1 &    1 are conjugate hyperbolas of each other..
a2 b2 a2 b2
y2 x2
Equation : – 2 =1
b2 a
a2
a2 = b2 (e2 – 1)  e= 1
b2
2a 2
Vertices(0,  b) ;  (L.R.) =
b
Note : (a) If e1 & e2 are the eccentrcities of the hyperbola & its conjugate then e 12 + e22 = 1.
(b) The foci of a hyperbola and its conjugate are concyclic and form the vertices of a
square.
(c) Two hyperbolas are said to be similar if they have the same eccentricity.
(d) Two similar hyperbolas are said to be equal if they have same latus rectum.
(e) If a hyperbola is equilateral then the conjugate hyperbola is also equilateral.
Conic Section
Example # 34 : Find the lengths of transverse axis and conjugate axis, eccentricity, the co-ordinates of foci,
vertices, length of the latus-rectum and equations of the directrices of the following hyperbola
16x 2 – 9y2 = – 144.
x2 y2
Solution : The equation 16x 2 – 9y2 = –144 can be written as – =–1
9 16
x2 y2
This is of the form – =–1  a2 = 9, b2 = 16  a = 3, b = 4
a2 b2
Length of transverse axis : The length of transverse axis = 2b = 8
Length of conjugate axis : The length of conjugate axis = 2a = 6
 a2   9  5
Eccentricity : e = 1   = 1   =
 b2   16  4
 
Foci : The co-ordinates of the foci are (0, + be) i.e., (0, + 5)
Vertices : The co–ordinates of the vertices are (0, + b) i.e., (0, + 4)
2a 2 2(3 )2 9
Length of latus–rectum : The length of latus–rectum = = =
b 4 2
Equation of directrices : The equation of directrices are
b 4 16
y=+  y=+  y=+
e (5 / 4) 5
(47) Find the equation of the hyperbola whose foci are (6, 4) and (– 4, 4) and eccentricity is 2.
(48) Obtain the equation of a hyperbola with coordinates axes as principal axes given that the
distances of one of its vertices from the foci are 9 and 1 units.
x2 y2
(49) The foci of a hyperbola coincide with the foci of the ellipse + = 1. Find the equation of
25 9
the hyperbola if its eccentricity is 2.
x2 y2 y2 x2
Ans. (47) 12x 2 – 4y2 – 24x + 32y – 127 = 0 (48) – = 1, – =1
16 9 16 9
(49) 3x 2 – y2 – 12 = 0.
Auxiliary Circle :
A circle drawn with centre C and transverse axis as a diameter is called the auxiliary circle of the
hyperbola. Equation of the auxiliary circle is x 2 + y2 = a2.
Note from the following figure that P & Q are called the "corresponding points" of the hyperbola & the
auxiliary circle.
Conic Section
Parametric representation :
x2 y2
The equations x = a sec & y = b tan  together represent the hyperbola   1 where is a
a2 b2
parameter.
Note that if P()  (a sec  b tan ) is on the hyperbola then Q()  (a cos  a sin ) is on the auxiliary
circle.
The equation to the chord of the hyperbola joining the two points P( & Q( is given by
x α β  y α β  α β .
cos sin cos
a 2 b 2 2
Position of a point 'P' w.r.t. a hyperbola :
2 2
x y
The quantity S1  1  1  1 is positive, zero or negative according as the point (x 1, y1) lies inside,
a2 b2
on or outside the curve.
Example # 35 : Find the position of the point (5, – 4) relative to the hyperbola 9x 2 – y2 = 1.
Solution : Since 9 (5) 2 – (–4)2 – 1 = 225 – 16 – 1 = 208 > 0,

So the point (5,–4) lies inside the hyperbola 9x 2 – y2 = 1.
Line and a hyperbola :

x2 y2
The straight line y = mx + c is a secant, a tangent or passes outside the hyperbola  1
a2 b2
according as : c 2 > or = or < a2 m 2  b2, respectively.
Tangents :
x2 y2
(i) Slope form : y = m x ± 2
a m
2 2
b
can be taken as the tangent to the hyperbola   1,
a2 b2
having slope 'm'.
x2 y2
(ii) Point form : Equation of tangent to the hyperbola   1 at the point (x 1, y1) is
a2 b2
xx 1  yy 1  .
2 2 1
a b
x2 y2
(iii) Parametric form : Equation of the tangent to the hyperbola 2
 2  1 at the point.
a b
y nθ
(a sec , b tan ) is x sec θ  ta  1 .
a b
  
 cos θ1 θ 2 
  
Note : (i) Point of intersection of the tangents at P(1) & Q(2) is  a 2 , btan θ1 θ 2 
   2 
 cos θ1 θ 2 
 2 
(ii) If |1 + 2| = , then tangents at these points (1 & 2) are parallel.
(iii) There are two parallel tangents having the same slope m. These tangents touches the hyperbola
at the extremities of a diameter.
Conic Section
x2 y2
Example # 36 : For what value of  for which line 2x + y +  = 0 touches the hyperbola – =1
16 9
x2 y2
Solution : This line will touch the hyperbola – =1 if c2 = a2m 2 – b2
a2 b2
2 = 16 × 4 – 9
2= 55  = 55
Self Practice problems :
(50) For what value of  does the line y = 2x + touches the hyperbola 16x 2 – 9y2 = 144 ?
(51) Find the equation of the tangent to the hyperbola x2 – y2 = 1 which is parallel to the line
4y = 5x + 7.
Ans. (50) =±2 5 (51) 4y = 5x ± 3
Normals :
x2 y2
(a) The equation of the normal to the hyperbola 2
 2  1 at the point P (x 1, y1) on it is
a b
2 2
a x  b y = a2 + b2 = a2 e2.
x1 y1
x2 y2
(b) The equation of the normal at the point P (a sec , b tan ) on the hyperbola   1 is
a2 b2
ax  by = a2 + b2 = a2 e2.
sec θ tan θ
( 2  2)
(c) Equation of normals in terms of its slope 'm' are y = mx  a b m .
a b m
2 2 2
Self Practice problems :

x2 y2
(52) Prove that the line lx + my – n = 0 will be a normal to the hyperbola – =1
a2 b2
a2 b2 (a 2  b 2 ) 2
if 2
– 2
=.
 m n2
(53) Find the locus of the foot of perpendicular from the centre upon any normal to the hyperbola
x2 y2
– = 1.
a2 b2
Ans. (53) (x 2 + y2)2 (a2y2 – b2x 2) = x 2y2 (a2 + b2)2
Pair of tangents :
The equation to the pair of tangents which can be drawn from any point (x 1, y1) to the hyperbola
x 2  y = 1 is given by: SS = T² where :
2
a 2
b2 1
2 2
x  2 y2 x1 y1 xx1 yy1
S a –1 ; S1 =  –1; T 2 – – 1.
2
b2 a 2
b 2
a b2
Conic Section
x2 y2
Example # 37 : How many real tangents can be drawn from the point (4, 3) to the hyperbola – =1. Find
16 9
the equation of these tangents & angle between them.
Solution : Given point P  (4, 3)
x2 y2
Hyperbola S – –1=0
16 9
16 9
 S1  – –1=–1<0
16 9
 Point P  (4, 3) lies outside the hyperbola.
 Two tangents can be drawn from the point P(4, 3).
Equation of pair of tangents is SS 1 = T 2
 x2 y2  2

   1 . (– 1) =  4 x  3 y  1
 16 9 
   16 9 
x2 y2 x2 y2 xy x 2y
 – + +1= + +1– – +
16 9 16 9 6 2 3
4
 3x 2 – 4xy – 12x + 16y = 0   = tan–1  
3
Director circle :
The locus of the point of intersection of the tangents which are at right angle is known as the director
circle of the hyperbola. The equation to the director circle is : x 2 + y2 = a2  b2.
If b2 < a2 , then the director circle is real.
If b2 = a2 (i.e. rectangular hyperbola), then the radius of the director circle is zero and it reduces to a
point circle at the origin. In this case centre is the only point from which two perpendicular tangents
can be drawn on the curve.
If b2 > a2, then the radius of the director circle is imaginary, so that there is no such circle and so no pair
of tangents at right angle can be drawn to the curve.
Chord of contact :
Equation to the chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point P(x 1, y 1 ) to the hyperbola
x2 y2 xx1 yy1
– = 1 is T = 0, where T = 2 – –1
a 2
b 2
a b2
x2 y2
Example # 38 : If tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax intersect the hyperbola – = 1 at A and B, then find
a2 b2
the locus of point of intersection of tangents at A and B.
Solution : Let P  (h, k) be the point of intersection of tangents at A & B
xh yk
 equation of chord of contact AB is =1 –
.............(i)
a b2 2
2
which touches the parabola equation of tangent to parabola y = 4ax
a a
y = mx +  mx – y = – .............(ii)
m m
equation (i) & (ii) as must be same
a

m 1 m h b2 ak
 = =  m= 2 &m=– 2
 h   k 1 k a b
 2  2 
a   b 
hb 2 ak b4
 =–  locus of P is y 2 = – .x
ka 2 b2 a3
Conic Section
x2  y = 1 whose middle point is (x , y ) is T = S ,
2
Equation of the chord of the hyperbola a 2 2 1 b
1 1
x12 y12 xx1 yy1

where S1 = 2
 2 –1; T – – 1.
a b a 2
b2
x2 y2
Example # 39 : Find the locus of the mid - point of chords of the hyperbola – = 1.
25 9
Solution : Let P  (h, k) be the mid-point
xh yk h2 k2
 equation of chord whose mid-point is given is – –1= – –1
a2 b2 a2 b2
6x 4y x2 y2
– = – –1
25 9 25 9
x2 y2
(54) Find the equation of the chord – = 1 which is bisected at (2, 1).
36 9
(55) Find the point 'P' from which pair of tangents PA & PB are drawn to the hyperbola
x2 y2
– = 1 in such a way that (5, 2) bisect AB
25 16
 20 8 
Ans. (54) x = 2y (55)  , 
 3 3
Rectangular hyperbola (equilateral hyperbola) :
The particular kind of hyperbola in which the lengths of
the transverse & conjugate axis are equal is called an
Equilateral Hyperbola. Note that the eccentricity of the
rectangular hyperbola is 2 .
Since a = b
equation becomes x2 – y2 = a2
b2
e= 1 = 1 1 = 2
a2
Rotation of this system through an angle of 45° in clockwise direction gives another form to the equation of
rectangular hyperbola.
a2
which is xy = c2 where c2 = .
2
Rectangular hyperbola (xy = c 2) :
Vertices : (c, c) & ( c,  c);
Foci :   
2 c, 2 c &  2 c,  2 c , 
Directrices : x + y =  2 c
Latus Rectum (l ) :  = 2 2 c = T.A. = C.A.

Parametric equation x = ct, y = c/t, t  R – {0}
Equation of a chord joining the points P (t 1) & Q(t 2) is x + t 1 t 2 y = c (t 1 + t 2).
x y x
Equation of the tangent at P (x 1, y1) is  = 2 & at P (t) is + t y = 2 c.
x1 y1 t
Equation of the normal at P (t) is x t 3  y t = c (t 4  1).
Chord with a given middle point as (h, k) is kx + hy = 2hk.
Conic Section
Example # 40 : A triangle has its vertices on a rectangular hyperbola. Prove that the orthocentre of the triangle
also lies on the same hyperbola.
Solution : Let "t 1", "t2" and "t 3" are the vertices of the triangle ABC, described on the rectangular hyperbola
xy = c2.
 c  

 c
Co–ordinates of A,B and C are  ct1,  ,  ct 2 ,  and  ct 3 , c  respectively
 t   t3 
 t1   2   
c(t 3  t 2 ) 1
Now slope of BC is c (t  t ) t t = – t t
2 3 2 3 2 3
 Slope of AD is t 2t 3
c
Equation of Altitude AD is y – = t 2t 3(x – ct 1)
t1
or t 1y – c = x t 1t 2t 3 – ct 12t 2t 3 .....(1)
Similarly equation of altitude BE is
t 2y – c = x t 1t 2t 3 – ct 1t 22t 3 ......(2)
 c 
Solving (1) and (2), we get the orthocentre   t t t ,ct 1t 2 t 3  which lies on xy = c2.
 12 3 
Important results :
 Difference of focal distances is a constant, i.e. |PS – PS| = 2a
x2 y2
 Locus of the feet of the perpendicular drawn from focus of the hyperbola   1 upon any tangent
a2 b2
is its auxiliary circle i.e. x 2 + y2 = a2 & the product of these perpendiculars is b 2.
P
T
S S
T
 The portion of the tangent between the point of contact & the directrix subtends a right angle at the
corresponding focus.
S
T
Conic Section
 The tangent & normal at any point of a hyperbola bisect the angle between the focal radii. This explains
the reflection property of the hyperbola as "An incoming light ray " aimed towards one focus is
reflected from the outer surface of the hyperbola towards the other focus. It follows that if an ellipse and
a hyperbola have the same foci, they cut at right angles at any of their common point.
x2 y2 x2 y2
Note that the ellipse   1 & the hyperbola  = 1 (a > k > b > 0) are confocal
a2 b2 a2  k 2 k 2  b2
and therefore orthogonal.
 A rectangular hyperbola circumscribing a triangle also passes through the orthocentre of this triangle.
 c   c 
If  ct i , t  i = 1, 2, 3 be the angular points P, Q, R then orthocentre is  t t t , c t1 t 2 t 3  .
 i   1 23 
Example # 41 : A ray originating from the point (5, 0) is incident on the hyperbola 9x 2 – 16y2 = 144 at the point
P with abscissa 8. Find the equation of the reflected ray after first reflection and point P lying
in first quadrant.
Solution : Given hyperbola is 9x 2 – 16y2 = 144. This equation can be
x2 y2
rewritten as – =1 ......(1)
16 9
Since x co–ordinate of P is 8. Let y
co–ordinate of P is .
64 2
 (8,) lies on (1)  – =1
16 9
 2 = 27  =3 3
( P lies in first quadrant) Hence co-ordinate of point P is (8,3 3 ).
 Equation of reflected ray passes through P (8,3 3 ) and S(–5,0)
03 3
 Its equation is y – 3 3 = (x – 8)
58
or 13y – 39 3 = 3 3 x – 24 3 or 3 3 x – 13y + 15 3 = 0.
'kkado ifjPNsn
Everything should be made as simple as possible, but not simpler...... Einstein, Albert
bl v/;k; es a ijofyd oØks a ij /;ku ds U nz h r fd;k x;k gS ftudks lery ds }kjk ,d 'ka d q dks dkVus ij
fofHkUu iz d kj ds oØks a iz k Ir gks r s gS ftudks 'kka d o ifjPNs n dgk tkrk gS A ,d 'ka d q ¼vko';d ugha gS fd
ledks . kh; o` Ù kkdkj gS ½ dks lery ds }kjk fofHkUu rjhdks a es a dkVk tk ldrk gS vr% buls g fofHkUu iz d kj
ds 'kka d o ifjPNs n iz k Ir gks r s gS A
vkjEHk es a 'kka d o ifjPNs n dh ifjHkk"kk ys r s gS ftles a ge ns [ krs gS fd ledks . kh; 'ka d q dks dkVk tkrk gS A
'kka d o ifjPNs n
;fn dks b Z fcUnq ,d lery es a bl iz d kj xfr djrk gS fd bldh mlh lery es a fLFkr ,d fLFkj fcUnq ls nw j h
,oa ,d fLFkj js [ kk ls yEcor~ nw j h dk vuq i kr lnS o vpj jgrk gks ] rks ml fcUnq dk fcUnq i Fk 'kka d o ifjPNs n
;k 'kka d o dgykrk gS A
• fLFkj fcUnq dks ukfHk dgrs gS a A
• fLFkj js [ kk dks fu;rk dgrs gS A
• vpj vuq i kr dks mRds U nz r k dgrs gS ftls e ls fu:fir fd;k tkrk gS A
PS
e
PM
• ljy js [ kk tks ukfHk ls xq t jrh gS vkS j fu;rk ij yEc gks r h gS ] 'kka d o dk v{k dgykrh gS A
• 'kka d o o mlds v{k dk iz f rPNs n fcUnq 'kh"kZ dgykrk gS A
;fn S (p, q) gS rFkk x + my + n = 0 fu;rk gks ] rks
| x  my  n |
PS = ( x –  ) 2  ( y – ) 2 rFkk PM =
 2  m2
PS
=e  (2 + m2) [(x – p)2 + (y – q)2] = e2 (x + my + n)2
PM
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
fofHkUu leryks a }kjk yEco` Ù kh; 'ka d q dk ifjPNs n u

(Section of right circular cone by different planes) :
fp=k 1 es a ,d yEco` Ù kh; 'ka d q fn[kk;k x;k gS a A
'kkado ifjPNsn
(i) ;fn lery yEco` Ù kh; 'ka d q ds 'kh"kZ v ls xq t jrk gS a rks iz f rPNs n u oØ 'kh"kZ ls xq t jus okyh ,d ljy js [ kk
;q X e gks r h gS a tS l kfd fp=k  2 es a fn[kk;k x;k gS A
Q
fp=k & 2
(ii) ;fn lery 'ka d q ds vk/kkj ds lekUrj gks ] rks iz f rPNs n u oØ ,d o` Ù k gks r k gS a tS l kfd fp=k  3 es a fn[kk;k
x;k gS a A
(iii) ;fn lery 'ka d q dh tud js [ kk ds lekUrj gks ] rks iz f rPNs n u oØ ,d ijoy; gks r k gS tS l kfd fp=k  4 es a
fn[kk;k x;k gS A
(iv) ;fn lery u rks 'kadq dh tud js[kk ds lekUrj gks vkSj u gh 'kadq ds v{k ds yEcor~ ;k lekUrj gks] rks izfrPNsnu oØ
,d nh?kZo`Ùk ;k vfrijoy; gksrk gS tSlkfd Øe'k% fp=k  5 esa ,oa fp=k  6 esa fn[kk;k x;k gSaA
fp=k -5 fp=k -6
'kkado ifjPNsn
f=kfofe; fp=k.k (3D View):
o`Ùk
nh?kZo`Ùk ijoy; vfrijoy;
'kkda o ds fofHkUu :i (Distinguishing various conics) :

'kkdao ifjPNsn dh iz Ñ fr] ukfHk S dh fu;rk ds lkis{ k fLFkfr vkS j mRdsU nzr k e ds eku ij fuHkZ j djrh gS A vr%
nks fofHkUu fLFkfr;k¡ mRiUu gks r h gS A
fLFkfr (I) tc ukfHk fu;rk ij fLFkr gks
bl fLFkfr es a   abc + 2fgh  af 2  bg 2  ch 2 = 0 vkS j 'kkda o dk O;kid lehdj.k ,d ljy js [ kk ;q X e dks
iz n f'kZ r djrk gS ;fn%
e > 1  h 2 > ab js [ kk,¡ okLrfod o fHkUu gks x h rFkk S ij iz f rPNs n djs x hA
e = 1  h 2 > ab js [ kk,¡ okLrfod vkS j la i krh gks x hA
e < 1  h 2 < ab js [ kk,¡ dkYifud gks x hA
fLFkfr (II) tc ukfHk fu;rk ij fLFkr u gks % &
bl fLFkfr es a mRds U nz r k 'e' ds fofHkUu ekuks a ds fy, 'kka d o ifjPNs n fofHkUu oØks a dks iz n f'kZ r djrk gS A
,d ijoy; gks xk ,d nh?kZ o ` Ù k gks xk ,d vfrijoy; gks xk vk;rh; vfrijoy; gks xk
;fn e = 1;   0, ;fn 0 < e < 1;   0; ;fn e > 1;   0; ;fn e > 1;   0
h² = ab h² < ab h² > ab h² > ab; a + b = 0
ijoy; (PARABOLA)
ifjHkk"kk vkSj lEcfU/kr 'kCn (Definition and Terminology) : Y
;fn dks b Z fcUnq bl iz d kj xfr djrk gS fd mldh ,d fLFkj fcUnq
ls nwj h lnS o ,d fLFkj js[ kk ls nw j h ds cjkcj jgrh gS rks ml fcUnq M P
dk fcUnq i Fk ijoy; dgykrk gS A fLFkj fcUnq dks ijoy; dh ukfHk L
vkS j fLFkj js [ kk dks ijoy; dh fu;rk dgrs gS A N
X
ijoy; ds pkj ekud :i gS a % Z A
S
y 2 = 4ax ; y 2 = –4ax ; x 2 = 4ay ; x 2 = –4ay.
L'
ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ds fy,
(i) 'kh"kZ (0, 0) (ii) ukfHk (a, 0) P'
2
(iii) v{k y = 0 (iv) fu;rk x + a = 0 y = 4ax
ukHkh; nw j h: ijoy; ij fLFkr fdlh Hkh fcUnq dh ukfHk ls nw j h] ml fcUnq dh ukHkh; nw j h dgykrh gS A
ukHkh; thok : ijoy; dh dks b Z thok tks ukfHk ls xq t jrh gS ] ijoy; dh ukHkh; thok dgykrh gS A
f}dk s f V : ijoy; dh og thok tks ijoy; ds v{k ds yEcor~ gks ] f}dks f V dgykrh gS A
ukfH kyEc : ukfHk ls xq tjus okyh f}dks fV ;k og ukHkh; thok tks ijoy; ds v{k ds yEcor~ gks ] ukfHkYkEc
(L.R.) dgykrh gS A
ijoy; y² = 4ax ds fy,  ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ = 4a.
 ukfHkyEc ds fljs L(a, 2a) ,oa L’ (a,  2a) gS a A
1
uks V : (i) fu;rk ls ukfHk dh yEcor~ nw j h = × ukfHkyEc
2
(ii) fu;rk o v{k ds iz f rPNs n fcUnq vkS j ukfHk dk e/; fcUnq ijoy; dk 'kh"kZ gks r k gS A
(iii) nks ijoy; cjkcj dgykrs gS ;fn muds ukfHkyEc leku gks A
'kkado ifjPNsn
mnkgj.k # 1 : ml ijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk (– 1, – 2) gks rFkk fu;rk x – 2y + 3 = 0 gks A
gy : ekuk ijoy; ij dks b Z fcUnq P(x, y) gS ftldh ukfHk S(– 1, – 2) ,oa fu;rk x – 2y + 3 = 0 gS A
fu;rk x – 2y + 3 = 0 ij yEc PM [kha f p,A
SP = PM
 SP 2 = PM 2
2
 x  2y  3 
 (x + 1) + (y + 2) = 
2 2 
 1 4 
 5 [(x + 1) 2 + (y + 2) 2] = (x – 2y + 3) 2
 5(x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y + 5) = (x 2 + 4y 2 + 9 – 4xy + 6x – 12y)
 4x 2 + y 2 + 4xy + 4x + 32y + 16 = 0
;g ijoy; dh vHkh"V lehdj.k gS a A
mnkgj.k # 2 : ijoy; 4y 2 + 12x – 20y + 67 = 0 dk 'kh"kZ v{k] ukfHk] fu;rk] ukfHkyEc Kkr dhft,A buds dPps
vkys [ k Hkh cukb,A
gy : fn;k x;k lehdj.k
67
4y 2 + 12x – 20y + 67 = 0  y 2 + 3x – 5y + =0
4
2 2
67 5 67 5
 y 2 – 5y = – 3x –  y 2 – 5y +   = – 3x – +  
4 2 4 2
2 2
 5 42  5  7
 y   = – 3x –  y   = – 3x   ....(i)
 2 4  2  2
7 5
ekuk x =X– ,y= Y+ ....(ii)
2 2
bu lEcU/kksa ds iz ; ks x ls lehdj.k (i) fuEu iz d kj ifjofrZ r gks tkrh gS a
Y 2 = – 3X ....(iii)
;g Y 2 = – 4aX :i dh gS A rq y uk djus ij 4a = 3  a = 3/4.
'kh"kZ - 'kh"kZ ds funs Z ' kka d (X = 0, Y = 0) gS a A
 7 5
vr% 'kh"kZ ds funs Z ' kka d   2 , 2  gS a A [(ii) es a X = 0, Y = 0 j[kus ij ]
 
v{k - ijoy; ds v{k dk lehdj.k Y = 0 gS a A

5
vr% v{k dk lehdj.k y = gS a A [(ii) es a Y = 0 j[kus ij ]
2
ukfHk - ukfHk ds funs Z ' kka d (X = –a, Y = 0) gS a s A

vFkkZ r~ (X = – 3/4, Y = 0).
vr% ukfHk ds funs Z ' kka d (–17/4, 5/2) gS a A [(ii) es a X = – 3/4 j[kus ij ]
3
fu;rk - fu;rk dh lehdj.k X = a gS vFkkZ r ~ X = .
4
11
vr% fu;rk dh lehdj.k x = – [(ii) es a X = 3/4 j[kus ij ]
4
ukfHkyEc - fn, x, ijoy; ds ukfHkyEc 4a = 3 gS a A
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z %
(1) ml ijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk (0, 0) gS rFkk ftldh fu;rk 3x – 4y + 2 = 0 gSaA
(2) ijoy; y = x 2 – 2x + 3 ds ukfHkyEc ds fljks a ds funs Z ' kka d Kkr dhft,A
(3) ml ijoy; dk lehdj.k rFkk ukfHkyEc Kkr dhft, ftldk 'kh"kZ ewy fcUnq rFkk fu;rk x + y = 2 gksA
(4) ijoy; y 2 – 8y – x + 19 = 0 dk 'kh"kZ ] v{k] ukfHk] fu;rk] ukfHkyEc Kkr dhft,A buds dPps vkys [ k
Hkh cukb,A
(5) ml ijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk (1, – 1) rFkk 'kh"kZ (2, 1) gS a A bldk v{k rFkk
ukfHkyEc Hkh Kkr dhft,A
1 9 3 9
Ans. (1) 16x 2 + 9y2 + 24xy – 12x + 16y – 4 = 0 (2)  ,   , 
 2 4  2 4
(3) 4 2 , x2 + y2 – 2xy + 8x + 8y = 0
(4)
(5) (2x – y – 3) 2 = – 20 (x + 2y – 4), Axis 2x – y – 3 = 0. LL = 4 5 .
izkpfyd fu:i.k (Parametric Representation) :

ijoy; ij fLFkr fdlh fcUnq ds funs Z ' kka d ks dks lcls ljy :i es a (at², 2at) fy[kk tkrk gS vFkkZ r ~ lehdj.k
x = at² ,oa y = 2at ,d lkFk ijoy; y² = 4ax dks O;Dr djrs gS ] tgk¡ t ,d iz k py gS A
ijoy; ij fLFkr nks fcUnq v ks a t 1 o t 2 dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k 2x  (t 1 + t 2) y + 2 at 1 t 2 = 0.
mnkgj.k # 3 : ijoy; (x – 1) 2 = –16 (y – 2) ds iz k pfyd lehdj.k Kkr dhft,A
gy :  4a = – 16  a = – 4, y – 2 = at2
x – 1 = 2 at  x = 1 – 8t, y = 2 – 4t2
vH;kl dk;Z %
(6) ijoy; x 2 = 4ay ds iz k pfyd lehdj.k Kkr dhft,A
Ans. x = 2at, y = at 2.
ijoy; ds lkis { k fdlh fcUnq dh fLFkfr

(Position of a point Relative to a Parabola) :
O;a t d y 1²  4ax 1 ds /kukRed] 'kw U ; ;k _.kkRed gks u s ds vuq l kj fcUnq (x 1, y 1) ijoy; y² = 4ax ds Øe'k%
ckgj] ijoy; ij ;k vUnj fLFkr gks x kA
S1 : y12 – 4ax1
S1 < 0  vUnj
S1 > 0  ckgj
mnkgj.k # 4 : tk¡ p dhft, fd fcUnq (3, 4) ijoy; y 2 = 4x ds vUnj gS ;k ckgjA

gy : y 2 – 4x = 0
 S 1 y 12 – 4x 1 = 16 – 12 = 4 > 0
 (3, 4) ijoy; ds ckgj fLFkr gS a A
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z %
(7)  ds ekuksa dk leqPp; Kkr dhft, ftlds fy, (, – 2 – ) ijoy; y2 + 4x = 0 ds vUnj fLFkr gksA
Ans.   (– 4 – 2 3 , – 4 + 2 3 )
ijyo; ,oa ljy js [ kk (Line & a Parabola) :

a > cm, = cm ;k < cm gks u s ds vuq l kj ljy js [ kk y = mx + c ijoy; y² = 4ax dks nks okLrfod ,oa fHkUu]
la i krh ;k dkYifud fcUnq v ks a ij iz f rPNs n djrh gS
 js [ kk] ijoy; dks Li'kZ djs x h ;fn c = a/m.
ijoy; }kjk js [ kk y = m x + c ij dkVs x;s vUr : [k.M dh yEckbZ
 4  a (1  m 2 ) (a  m c) .
= 
m2 
uks V : 1. t 1 ,oa t 2 dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k 2x  (t 1 + t 2) y + 2 at 1 t 2 = 0 gS A
2. ;fn ijoy; y² = 4ax dh ukHkh; thok ds fljs t 1 ,oa t 2 gks ] rks t 1 t 2 = 1 vr% ukHkh; thok ds fljka s
a 2a
ds funs Z ' kka d (at², 2at) ,oa  2 ,   gks a x s A
t t 
3. x- v{k ds lkFk  dks . k cukus okyh ukHkh; thok dh yEckbZ 4a cosec² gks r h gS A
mnkgj.k # 5 : ijoy; y 2 = 4x ds lkis { k js [ kk y = x + 1 dh fLFkfr crkb,A

gy : gy djus ij (x + 1) 2 = 4x  (x – 1) 2 = 0
vr% y = x + 1 ijoy; dh Li'kZ js [ kk gS a A
mnkgj.k # 6 : fl) dhft, fd ijoy; y 2 = 4ax (a > 0) ij fLFkr fcUnq P(at 2, 2at) dh ukHkh; nw j h a(1 + t 2) gS a A
gy :
 PS = PM = a + at 2  PS = a (1 + t 2).
mnkgj.k # 7: ;fn ijoy; y2 = x dh thok ds fljs t 1, t 2 lEcU/k t 1 t 2 = 8 dks lUrq " V djrs gks ] rks fl) dhft, fd
thok ges ' kk ,d fLFkj fcUnq ls xq t jrh gS A og fcUnq Hkh Kkr dhft,A
1 2 1  1 2 1 
gy :  t 1 , t1  o  4 t 2 , 2 t 2  dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k
4 2   
1 2  1 2 1 2 1 1
y– t1 = t  t  x  t 1   (t1 + t2) y – t – t1t2 = 2x – t12
2 1 2  4  2 1 2 2
2
y = t  t (x + 2) ( t1t2 = 8)  ;g js [ kk fLFkj fcUnq (– 2, 0) ls xq t jrh gS a A
1 2
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z :
(8) ;fn js [ kk y = 3x + ijoy; y 2 = 4x dks nks fHkUu&fHkUu fcUnq v ks a ij dkVrh gks ] rks  ds ekuks a dk
leq P p; Kkr dhft,A
(9) ijoy; y 2 = 4x dh thok x + y = 2 dk e/; fcUnq Kkr dhft,A
(10) ;fn ijoy; y 2 = 16x dh ukHkh; thok ds ,d fljs ds funsZ' kkad (16, 16) gks] rks vU; fljs ds funsZ' kkad
Kkr dhft,A
(11) ;fn ijoy; y 2 = 4ax (a > 0) dh ukHkh; thok PSQ gks tgk¡ S ukfHk gks ] rks fl) dhft, fd
1 1 1
+ = .
PS SQ a
(12) ukHkh; thok dh yEckbZ Kkr dhft, ftldk ,d fljk t gks A

2
 1
Ans. (8) (– , 1/3) (9) (4, – 2) (10) (1, – 4) (12) a t  
 t
ijoy; y² = 4ax ij Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k
(Tangents to the Parabola y² = 4ax) :
(i) fcUnq (x 1, y 1) ij y y 1 = 2 a (x + x 1)
 a  2a a
(ii) fcUnq  2 , m  ij y = mx + (m  0)
m  m
(iii) fcUnq (at², 2at) ij t y = x + a t².
uks V : fcUnq v ks a t 1 vkS j t 2 ij Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dk iz f rPNs n fcUnq ( at 1t 2 , a(t 1 + t 2) ) gks r k gS A

mnkgj.k # 8 : fl) dhft, fd ljy js [ kk y = mx + c ijoy; y 2 = 4a (x + a) dks Li'kZ djrh gS ;fn
a
c = ma +
m
gy : ijoy; y 2 = 4a(x + a) dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k ftldh iz o .krk m gks &
a  1
y = m(x + a) +  y = mx + a  m  
m  m
a
ijUrq nh xbZ Li'kZ js [ kk y = mx +c gS a A  c = am +
m
mnkgj.k # 9 : js[ kk y = 3x + 5 ls 45º dk dks . k cukus okyh ijoy; y2 = 8x dh Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft,
rFkk bldk Li'kZ fcUnq Kkr dhft,A
gy : vHkh"V js [ kk dh iz o .krk
3 1 1
m = m 1 = – 2, m2 =
1 3 2
 m iz o .krk okyh ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k
a
y = mx +
m
1  1
  ,  2  ij Li'kZ js [ kk y = – 2x – 1 ,oa (8,8) ij y = x+4
2  2
'kkado ifjPNsn
mnkgj.k # 10 : ijoy; y 2 = 9x dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, tks fcUnq (4, 10) ls xq t jrh gks A
9
gy : ijoy; y 2 = 9x dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k y = mx +
4m
9 1 9
 ;g (4, 10) xq t jrh gS  10 = 4m +  16 m 2 – 40 m + 9 = 0  m = ,
4m 4 4
x 9
 Li'kZ js [ kkvks a ds lehdj.k y = +9 ,oa y= x + 1.
4 4
mnkgj.k # 11: ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ,oa x 2 = 4by dh mHk;fu"V Li'kZ js [ kkvks a ds lehdj.k Kkr dhft,A
gy : ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k
a
y = mx + ........(i)
m
ijoy; x 2 = 4by dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k
b 1 b
x = m 1y +  y = x – ........(ii)
m1 m1 (m1 ) 2
mHk;fu"V Li'kZ js [ kk ds fy, (i) ,oa (ii) ,d gh js [ kk dks fu:fir djuh pkfg,A
1/ 3
1 a b a  a
 =m ,oa = – 2  = – bm 2  m =  
m1 m m1 m  b
1/ 3 1/ 3
 a  b
 mHk;fu"V Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k y =   b  x + a  
   a
vH;kl dk;Z %
(13) ijoy; y 2 = 4x dh ml Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, tks y– v{k ij 2 bdkbZ dk vUr%[k.M
dkVrh gks A
(14) fl) dhft, fd ijoy; dh fdlh Li'kZ js [ kk ij ukfHk ls Mkys x;s yEc dk ikn 'kh"kZ ij [kha p h xbZ
Li'kZ js [ kk ij fLFkr gks r k gS a A
(15) fl) dhft, fd ijoy; dh fdlh Li'kZ js [ kk ds lkis { k ukfHk dk iz f rfcEc fu;rk ij gks r k gS a A
(16) fl) dhft, fd ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh fdUgha rhu Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ls fufeZr f=kHkq t dk {ks= kQy muds Li'kZ
fcUnq v ks a ls fufeZ r f=kHkq t ds {ks = kQy dk vk/kk gks r k gS A
x
Ans. (13) y 2
2
ijoy; y² = 4ax ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k
(Normals to the parabola y² = 4ax) :
vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k Li'kZ js [ kk dh iz o .krk ls iz k Ir fd;k tk ldrk gS A

2a
(x1 , y1) ij Li'kZ js [ kk dh iz o .krk = y
1
y1
 vfHkyEc dh iz o .krk = –
2a
y1
(i) (x 1, y 1) ij y  y 1 =  (x  x 1) (ii) (am 2,  2am) ij y = mx  2am  am 3
2a
(iii) (at 2, 2at) ij vfHkyEc y + tx = 2at + at 3
'kkado ifjPNsn
uks V : (i) fcUnq v ks a t 1 o t 2 ij vfHkyEcks a dk iz f rPNs n fcUnq (a (t 12 + t 22 + t1t2 + 2),  a t1 t2 (t1 + t2)) gks r k gS A
P(t1)
(ii) ;fn ijoy; y² = 4ax ij fLFkr fcUnq t 1 ij vfHkyEc
 2
ijoy; dks iq u % fcUnq t 2 ij feyrk gks ] rks t 2=   t 1   .
 t1  Q(t2)
(iii) ;fn ijoy; y² = 4ax ij fLFkr fcUnq v ks a t 1 o t 2 ij vfHkyEc iq u % ijoy; ij fLFkr fcUnq 't 3' ij
iz f rPNs n djrs gks rks t 1 t 2 = 2; t 3 =  (t 1 + t 2) vkS j fcUnq v ks a t 1 o t 2 dks feykus okyh js [ kk fLFkj fcUnq
(2a, 0) ls xq t jrh gS A
(iv) ;fn fcUnq P(h, k) ls ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ij vfHkyEc [kha p k tkrk gks ] rks
k = mh  2am  am 3 vFkkZ r ~ am 3 + m(2a  h) + k = 0.
2a  h k
m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 ; m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 = ; m1 m2 m3 =  .
a a
A
P(h, k)
A, B, C  lg&vfHkyEc fcUnq
B
C
tgk¡ m 1, m 2 o m 3 rhu la x keh vfHkyEcks a dh iz o .krk,¡ gS A
 rhu la x keh vfHkyEcks a dh iz o .krkvks a dk chth; ;ks x 'kw U ; gks r k gS A
 lgvfHkyEc fcUnq v ks a ds iknks a dh dks f V;ks a dk chth; ;ks x 'kw U ; gks r k gS A
 lgvfHkyEc fcUnq v ks a ls fufeZ r f=kHkq t dk ds U nz d x- v{k ij gks r k gS A
mnkgj.k # 12 : fcUnq N dk fcUnq i Fk Kkr dhft, ftlls ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ij rhu vfHkyEc bl iz d kj [kha p s tkrs
gS fd
(i) bues a ls nks x- v{k ls leku >q d ko ij gks A
(ii) bues a ls nks ,d&nw l js ds yEcor~ gks A
gy : ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ds vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k y = mx – 2am – am 3
ekuk vfHkyEc fcUnq N(h, k) ls xq t jrk gS a A
 k = mh – 2am – am 3  am 3 + (2a – h) m + k = 0
(h, k) ds fy, ;g m es a f=k?kkr lehdj.k gS a A
ekuk m 1, m 2 ,oa m 3 ew y gS a A
 m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 ......(i)
2a  h
m 1m 2 + m 2m 3 + m 3m 1 = ......(ii)
a
k
m 1m 2m 3 = – ......(iii)
a
(i) ;fn nks vfHkyEc x- v{k ls leku >q d ko ij gks ] rks m 1 + m 2 = 0
 m3 = 0  y = 0
(ii) ;fn nks vfHkyEc yEcor~ gks ] rks  m1 m2 = – 1
k
lehdj.k (3) ls m3 = .....(iv)
a
k 2a  h
lehdj.k (2) ls –1+ (m 1 + m 2) = .....(v)
a a
k
lehdj.k (1) ls m1 + m2 = – .....(vi)
a
k2 h
lehdj.k (5) ,oa (6) ls – 1 – =2–  y 2 = a(x – 3a)
a a
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z %
(17) ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ij og fcUnq Kkr dhft, ftu ij vfHkyEc x– v{k ls 30° dks . k ij >q d s gks A
(18) ;fn ijoy; y2 = 4x ds fcUnq P(1,2) ij vfHkyEc bldks iqu % fcUnq Q ij dkVrk gks] rks Q ds funsZ 'kkad
Kkr dhft,A
(19) ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ds fcUnq t ij vfHkyEc thok dh yEckbZ Kkr dhft,A
(20) ;fn ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ds fcUnq t ij [kha p h xbZ vfHkyEc thok 'kh"kZ ij ledks . k cukrh gks ] rks fl)
dhft, fd t 2 = 2
(21) fl) dhft, fd ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh thok ftldk lehdj.k y – x 2 + 4a 2 = 0 gS ] oØ dk

vfHkyEc gS rFkk bldh yEckbZ 6 3a gS a A
(22) ;fn rhu fcUnq v ks a P, Q rFkk R ij vfHkyEc la x keh gks ] rks iz n f'kZ r dhft, fd
(i) vfHkyEcks dh iz o .krkvks a dk ;ks x 'kw U ; gS aA (ii) fcUnqv ks a P, Q, R dh dks fV;ksa dk ;ks x 'kwU ; gS a A
(iii) f=kHkq t PQR dk ds U nz d ijoy; ds v{k ij gS a A
3
a 2a   a 2a  4a(t 2
 1) 2
Ans. (17)  , ,  ,  (18) (9, – 6) (19) 
3   
 3  3 3  t2
Li'khZ ;q X e (Pair of Tangents) :

fdlh ckg~ ; fcUnq (x 1, y 1) ls ijoy; y² = 4ax ij [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dk lehdj.k SS 1 = T² }kjk fn;k
tkrk gS A
tgk¡ S  y²  4ax ; S 1 = y 1²  4ax 1 ; T  y y 1  2a(x + x 1).
A
(x1, y1) P
B
mnkgj.k # 13 : fcUnq P (–1,2) ls ijoy; y 2 = 4x ij [kha p h xbZ Li'khZ ;q X e dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft,A
gy : ge tkurs gS fd Li'kZ js [ kk ;q X e dk lehdj.k SS 1 = T² }kjk fn;k tkrk gS A
 (y2 – 4x) (4 + 4) = (2y – 2 (x – 1))2
 8y2 – 32x = 4y2 + 4x2 + 4 – 8xy + 8y – 8x  y2 – x2 + 2xy – 6x – 2y = 1
mnkgj.k # 14 : ;fn fcUnq P ls y 2 = 4ax ij [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dh iz o .krk,¡

Øe'k% m 1 ,oa m 2 bl iz d kj gS fd m1 m2 = –2 rks ml ijoy; dh fu;rk Kkr dhft,A
a
gy : y 2 = 4ax dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k y = mx +
m
ekuk ;g fcUnq P(h, k) ls xq t jrh gS a A
 m 2h – mk + a = 0
m1 m2 = –2  a = –2
vr% fu;rk dk lehdj.k x = 2 gS A
vH;kl dk;Z %
(23) ;fn fcUnq P ls ijoy; y 2 = 4ax ij Li'kZ js [ kk,¡ ijoy; ds v{k ls  1 ,oa  2 dks . k cukrh gks ] rks
fuEufyf[kr iz R ;s d ifjfLFkfr es a P dk fcUnq i Fk Kkr dhft,A
(i) tan 2 1 + tan 2 2 =  ( fu;rka d ) (ii) cos  1 cos  2 =  ( fu;rka d )
Ans. (i) y 2 – 2ax = x 2 , (ii) x 2 =  2 {(x – a) 2 + y 2}
'kkado ifjPNsn
fu;ked o` Ù k (Director Circle) :
fdlh oØ dh yEcor~ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a ds iz f rPNs n fcUnq v ks a dk fcUnq i Fk fu;ked o` Ù k dgykrk gS A ijoy;
y 2 = 4ax ds fy, bldk lehdj.k x + a = 0 gks r k gS tks fd bldh fu;rk gh gks r h gS A
Li'kZ thok (Chord of Contact) :

fcUnq P(x 1, y 1) ls [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ thok dk lehdj.k yy 1 = 2a (x + x 1).
uks V : fcUnq P (x 1, y 1) ls [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a vkS j Li'kZ thok }kjk cuk;s x;s f=kHkq t dk {ks = kQy
(y 1²  4ax 1) 3/2 ÷ 2a gks r k gS A
mnkgj.k # 15 : ;fn js [ kk x – y – 5 = 0 ijoy; y 2 = 8x dks fcUnq P ,oa Q ij iz f rPNs n djrh gks ] rks fcUnq
P ,oa Q ij [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dk iz f rPNs n fcUnq Kkr dhft,A
gy : ekuk Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dk iz f rPNs n fcUnq (h, k) gS ] rc Li'khZ thok dk lehdj.k
yk = 4(x + h)  4x – yk + 4h = 0 .....(i)
ijUrq fn;k x;k lehdj.k x – y – 5 = 0
4 k 4h
 = =  h = – 5, k = 4  fcUnq (–5, 4)
1 1  5
vH;kl dk;Z %
(24) fl) dhft, fd fdlh fcUnq ftldh ijoy; ds lkis { k Li'kZ thok ukfHk ls xq t jrh gS ] dk fcUnq i Fk
fu;rk gS a A
(25) ;fn js [ kk x – 2y + 1 = 0 ij pj fcUnq P ls ijoy; y 2 = 8x ij Li'khZ ;q X e [kha p k tkrk gks ] rks fl)
dhft, fd Li'khZ thok ,d fLFkj fcUnq ls xq t jrh gS rFkk bl fcUnq ds funs Z ' kka d Kkr dhft,A
Ans. (25) (1, 8)
e/;fcUnq ds :i es a thok dk lehdj.k (Chord with a given middle point) :
ijoy; y² = 4ax dh thok] ftldk e/;fcUnq (x 1, y 1) gS a ]
2a M(x,y)
y  y1 = (x  x 1)  T = S 1 gks r k gS A +
y1
mnkgj.k # 16 : ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh thok ds e/;fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk Kkr dhft, tks fn, x, fcUnq (p, q) ls xq tjrh gksA
gy : ekuk ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh thok dk e/; fcUnq P(h,k) gS A
vr% thok dk lehdj.k yk – 2a(x + h) = k 2 – 4ah.
pw a f d ;g fcUnq (p, q) ls xq t jrh gS a A
 qk – 2a (p + h) = k 2 – 4ah
 vHkh"V fcUnq i Fk y 2 – 2ax – qy + 2ap = 0.
mnkgj.k # 17 : ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh thok ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnq i Fk Kkr dhft, tks js [ kk x +2y = 0 ds lekUrj gS &
gy : ekuk ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh thok dk e/;fcUnq P(h,k) gS a A
vr% thok dk lehdj.k yk – 2a(x + h) = k 2 – 4ah
2a k 2a
ijUrq iz o .krk = =m =
k 2 1
 fcUnq i Fk k = –4a y = 4a gS a A
'kkado ifjPNsn
vE;kl dk;Z %
(26) ijoy; y 2 = 4x dh ml thok dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldk e/;fcUnq (4, 2) gks A
(27) ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh ml thok ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnq i Fk Kkr dhft, tks ijoy; x 2 = 4by dks Li'kZ
djrh gks A
Ans. (26) x–y–2=0 (27) y (2ax – y2) = 4a2b
egRoiw.kZ fcUnq (Im portant Hig hlights) :

(i) ;fn ijo;y ds fdlh fcUnq P ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kk ,oa vfHkyEc v{kksa dks Øe'k% T o G ij izfrPNsn
djrs gks ] rks ST = SG = SP tgk¡ S ukfHk gS A nw l js 'kCnks a es a ] ijoy; ij fLFkr fdlh fcUnq P ij
[kha p h xbZ Li'kZ js [ kk ,oa vfHkyEc ukHkh; f=kT;k SP vkS j P ls fu;rk ij Mkys x;s yEc ds chp dks . k
dh lef}Hkktd gks r h gS A blls ;g fu"d"kZ fudyrk gS fd S ls mRlftZ r gks u s okyh lHkh fdj.ks a
ijkorZ u ds i'pkr~ ijyo; ds v{k ds lekUrj gks tkrh gS A
(ii) ijoy; dh fdlh Li'kZ js [ kk dk fu;rk vkS j oØ ds chp dVk vUr% [k.M ukfHk ij 90° dk dks . k
vkUrfjr djrk gS A
(iii) ukHkh; thok ds fljksa ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kk,¡ fu;rk ij yEcor~ izfrPNsn djrh gSA vr% ukHkh; thok dks O;kl
ekudj [khapk x;k o`Ùk fu;rk dks Li'kZ djrk gSA fcUnq P (at2, 2at) dh ukHkh; nwjh dks O;kl ekudj [khapk x;k
o`Ùk] 'kh"kZ ij Li'kZ js[kk dks Li'kZ djrk gSA
P
R
S A
O
(iv) ,d ijoy; dh dks b Z Li'kZ js [ kk vkS j ml ij ukfHk ls Mkyk x;k yEc ijLij] 'kh"kZ ij [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ
js [ kk ij feyrh gS A
(v) fdlh ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dk v)Z u kfHkyEc] ijoy; dh fdlh Hkh ukHkh; thok ds [k.Mks a dk gjkRed
ek/; gks r k gS A
P
S
2(PS )(SQ )
Q = 2a
PS  SQ
(vi) fdlh ijoy; ij fLFkr rhu fcUnq v ks a ls fufeZ r f=kHkq t dk {ks = kQy] bu fcUnq v ks a ij [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ
js [ kkvks a ls fufeZ r f=kHkq t ds {ks = kQy dk nq xq u k gks r k gS A
'kkado ifjPNsn
nh?kZ o ` Ù k (ELLIPSE)
ifjHkk"kk %
nh?kZo `Ùk ,d ,sl s fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gSa tks lery esa bl izdkj xeu djrk gS fd bldh lery esa fLFkr ,d fuf'pr
fLFkj fcUnq rFkk ,d fuf'pr fLFkj js[kk ¼tks fd fLFkj fcUnq ls ugha xqtjrh gks rFkk lHkh fcUnq rFkk js[kk ,d gh lery
esa gks½ ls yEcor~ nwj h dk vuqikr vpj gks] tks fd ,d ls de gksrk gSA
tgk¡] fLFkj fcUnq nh?kZo `Ùk dh ukfHk dgykrk gSA
fLFkj js[ kk nh?kZo `Ùk dh fu;rk dgykrh gSA
vpj vuqikr nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRds U nz r k dgykrk gS] ftls e ls fu:fir fd;k tkrk gSA
1
mnkgj.k # 18 : ml nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk (– 1, 1), fu;rk x – y + 3 = 0 rFkk mRdsUnzrk gksA
2
PS 1
gy : ekuk fd P  (h, k) ,d pfyr fcUnq gSa e= =
PM 2
2
1 h k  3
 (h + 1)2 + (k – 1)2 =  
4  2 
 P(h, k) dk fcUnq iFk
8 {x 2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 2} = (x 2 + y2 – 2xy + 6x – 6y + 9)
7x 2 + 7y2 + 2xy + 10x – 10 y + 7 = 0
uks V : 'kkado] ftldh ukfHk (p, q) rFkk fu;rk lx + my + n = 0 gS] dk O;kid lehdj.k gksxk&
(l 2 + m 2) [(x  p)2 + (y  q)2] = e2 (lx + my + n) 2  ax 2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
tks ,d nh?kZo `Ùk dks iznf'kZr djrk gS ;fn 0 < e < 1;   0, h² < ab gksA
vH;kl dk;Z :-
1
(28) ml nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk (0, 0), fu;rk x + y – 1 = 0 ,oa mRdsUnzrk e =
2
gksA
Ans. 3x 2 + 3y2 – 2xy + 2x + 2y – 1 = 0.
nh?kZ o` Ù k dk ekud lehdj.k %

nh?kZo `Ùk dk ekud lehdj.k ftlds eq[; v{k
funsZ'kkad v{kksa ds vuqfn'k gks] gksxk&
x2 y2
 = 1, tgk¡ a > b rFkk b² = a² (1  e²).
a2 b2
b2
mRds U nz r k : e = 1  , (0 < e < 1)
a2
ukfHk;k¡ : S  (a e, 0) rFkk S ( a e, 0).
a a
fu;rkvks a ds lehdj.k : x = rFkk x =  .
e e
nh?kZ v{k : 2a yEckbZ okyk js[kk[k.M AA ftl ij ukfHk;k¡ SrFkk S fLFkr gks nh?kZv{k dgykrk gSa tgk¡ (a > b), nh?kZv{k
rFkk fu;rk dk izfrPNsn fcUnq (z) fu;rk dk ikn dgykrk gSA
y?kqv {k : y-v{k nh?kZo`Ùk dks fcUnq B  (0,  b) ,oa B  (0, b) ij izfrPNsn djrk gSA js[ kk[k.M BB ftldh yEckbZ
2b (b < a) gS ] nh?kZ o ` Ùk dk y?kq v{k dgykrk gS A
eq [ ; v{k : nh?kZv{k rFkk y?kqv{k nksuksa ,d lkFk nh?kZo `Ùk ds eq[ ; v{k dgykrs gSA
'kh"kZ : nh?kZo `Ùk rFkk nh?kZv{k ds izfrPNsn fcUnq A ( a, 0) rFkk A  (a, 0) 'kh"kZ dgykrs gSA
ukHkh; thok : nh?kZo `Ùk dh og thok tks ukfHk ls xqtjrh gks] ukHkh; thok dgykrh gSA
'kkado ifjPNsn
f}dks f V : nh?kZv{k ds yEcor~ thok] f}dksfV dgykrh gSA
ukfHkyEc : og ukHkh; thok tks nh?kZv{k ds yEcor~ gks ukfHkyEc dgykrh gSA
2b 2 ( y?kq v{k )2 2
ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ (LL) = a  nh?kZ v{k  2a (1  e )
= 2 e .(ukfHk dh mlds la xr fu;rk ls nw j h)

dsU nz : og fcUnq tks 'kkado dh ml izR;sd thok dks lef}Hkkftr djrk gSa tks bl fcUnq ls xqtjrh gSa] 'kkado dk dsUnz
2 y2
dgykrk gSA nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 dk dsUnz C  (0, 0) ewy fcUnq gSA
a b
2 y2
uks V : (i) ;fn nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k x2  2 = 1 }kjk fn;k x;k gSa rFkk dqN Hkh ifjHkkf"kr ugh fd;k gks] rks
a b
a > b fy;k tkrk gS A
(ii) ;fn b > a fn;k x;k gks] rks y-v{k nh?kZv{k rFkk x-v{k y?kqv{k gksxk rFkk vU; lHkh fcUnq ,oa js[ kk,¡ blds
vuql kj ifjofrZr gks tk;asxsA
x2 y2
lehdj.k : 2 + =1 ls çnf'kZr nh?kZo `Ùk ds fy,
a b2
b
ukfHk;ka (0, be) fu;rk,¡ :y =  e
a2
a2 = b2 (1 – e2), a < b.  e= 1–
b2
'kh"kZ (0, b) , ukfHkyEc y = be
2a 2
 (L·R.) = , dsUnz : (0, 0)
b
mnkgj.k # 19 : ml nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldk dsUnz ewy fcUnq gks] funsZ'kkad v{k blds v{k gks rFkk tks fcUnq
(2, 2) ,oa (3, 1) ls xq tjrk gks A
x2 y2
gy : ekuk fd nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k + = 1 gS A
a2 b2
pw¡fd ;g fcUnq (2, 2) rFkk (3, 1) ls xqtjrk gSaA
4 4
 2 + =1 ..........(i)
a b2
9 1
rFkk 2 + =1 .........(ii)
a b2
lehdj.k (i) – 4 (ii) djus ij
4  36 32
= 1– 4  a2 =
a2 3
lehdj.k (i) ls &
1 1 3 83 32
2 = – = b2 =  nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k 3x 2 + 5y2 = 32 gSA
b 4 32 32 5
'kkado ifjPNsn
1
mnkgj.k # 20 : ml nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk;k¡ (4, 0) rFkk (– 4, 0) ,oa mRdsUnzrk gksA
3
gy : pw¡fd nksuksa ukfHk;k¡ x-v{k ij fLFkr gSa] blfy, x-v{k nh?kZv{k gS] rFkk ukfHk;ksa dk e/;fcUnq ewyfcUnq gS tks
dsUnz gSa rFkk nh?kZv{k ds yEcor~ ,oa dsUnz ls xqtjus okyh js[ kk y?kqv{k gS tks y-v{k gSA
x2 y2
ekuk nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k + = 1 gS A
a2 b2
1
 ae = 4 rFkk e= (fn;k x;k gSA)  a = 12 rFkk b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
3
 1
 b2 = 144  1    b = 16 × 8  b=8 2
 9 
x2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k + = 1 gS A
144 128
mnkgj.k # 21 : ;fn nh?kZo`Ùk ds ukfHk yEc dh yEckbZ mlds v)nh?kZ v{k dh vk/kh gS rks ml nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk Kkr dhft,A
x2 y2
gy : ekuk fd nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k + = 1 gS A (a > b)
a2 b2
2b2 a b2 1 b2 3
=  =  e= 1 =
a 2 a2 4 a2 2
(x  2)2 (y  4)2
mnkgj.k # 22 : nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ds v{kksa ds lehdj.k] fu;rk] ukfHk ds funsZ'kkad] dsUnz] 'kh"kZ] ukfHkyEc dh
25 16
yEckbZ rFkk mRdsUnzrk Kkr dhft,A
X2 Y2
gy : ekuk x – 2 = X, y – 4 = Y, vr% nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k + = 1 gks tkrk gS A
52 42
nh?kZv{k dk lehdj.k Y = 0  y = 4.
y?kqv{k dk lehdj.k X = 0  x = 2.
dsUnz (X = 0, Y = 0)  x = 2, y = 4  C  (2, 4)
v/kZ-nh?kZv{k dh yEckbZ a = 5, nh?kZv{k dh yEckbZ 2a = 10
v/kZ-y?kqv{k dh yEckbZ b = 4, y?kqv{k dh yEckbZ = 2b = 8.
a2  b2 25  16 3
ekuk mRdsUnzrk e gSa  b2 = a2 (1 – e2)  e= 2 = = .
a 25 5
2b 2 2  16 32
ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ = LL = = = ukfHk;ksa ds funsZ'kkad X = ± ae, Y = 0
a 5 5
 S  (X = 3, Y = 0) ,oa S (X = –3, Y = 0)
 S  (5, 4) ,oa S (–1, 4)
'kh"kks ± ds funs Z ' kka d
nh?kZv{k ds vUr fcUnq A  (X = a, Y = 0) ,oa A (X = – a, Y = 0)
 A  (x = 7, y = 4) ,oa A = (x = – 3, y = 4)
A  (7, 4) ,oa A (– 3, 4)
y?kqv{k ds vUr fcUnq B (X = 0, Y = b) ,oa B  (X = 0, Y = – b)
B (x = 2, y = 8) ,oa B (x = 2, y = – 0)
B  (2, 8) ,oa B (2, 0)
a
fu;rk dk lehdj.k X = ±
e
25 31 19
x–2=±  x= ,oa x=–
3 3 3
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z :
(29) ml nh?kZo `Ùk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftlds v{kksa dh yEckbZ; k¡ Øe'k% 6 rFkk 2 6 gSa rFkk muds
lehdj.k Øe'k% x – 3y + 3 = 0 rFkk 3x + y – 1 = 0 gSA
(30) ml nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk Kkr dhft, ftldk y?kqv{k ukfHkyEc dk nqxquk gSA
(31) nh?kZo `Ùk 4x 2 + 9y2 = 1 dh ukfHk;ksa ds funsZ'kkad Kkr dhft,A
x2 y2
(32) ml nh?kZo `Ùk dk ekud lehdj.k + = 1 Kkr dhft, tks fcUnq (2, 1) ls xq tjrk gks rFkk ftldh
a2 b2
1
mRdsUnzrk gksA
2
Ans. (29) 3(x – 3y + 3) 2 + 2(3x+ y – 1) 2 = 180, 21x 2 – 6xy + 29y 2 + 6x – 58y – 151 = 0.
 
(30)
3
(31)   5 , 0 (32) 3x 2 + 4y2 = 16
2  6 
 
lgk;d o` Ù k / mRds U nz h ; dks . k :( Auxiliary Circle / Eccentric Angle )

fdlh nh?kZo `Ùk ds nh?kZv{k dks O;kl ekudj [khapk x;k o`Ùk lgk;d o` Ù k dgykrk gSA
ekuk fd lgk;d o`Ùk x² + y² = a² ij ,d fcUnq Q bl izdkj gS fd Q ls xqtjus okyh] x-v{k ds yEcor~ ljy js[ kk
nh?kZo `Ùk dks P ij izfrPNsn djrh gS] rks fcUnq P rFkk Q (Øe'k% nh?kZo `Ùk rFkk lgk;d o`Ùk ij fLFkr) la xr fcUnq
dgykrs gSA  ( < ) dks nh?kZo `Ùk ij fLFkr fcUnq P dk mRds U nz h ; dks . k dgrs gSA
Q  (a cos , a sin) P  (a cos , b sin)
ukHkh; xq . k/keZ : nh?kZo `Ùk ij fdlh Hkh fcUnq dh nksuks ukfHk;ksa ls nwfj;ksa dk ;ksx ges'kk nh?ko`ÙkZ dh nh?kZv{k dh yEckbZ ds
cjkcj gksrk gSA
Proof : ekuk fd nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk e gSA
 PS = e . PM
a 
= e   a cos  
 e 
PS = (a – a e cos)
rFkk PS = e. PM
 a
= e  a cos   
 e
PS = a + ae cos
 ukHkh; nwfj;k¡ (a ± ae cos) gSA
PS + PS = 2a, PS + PS = AA= nh?kZ v{k dh yEckbZ
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z :
x2 y2
(33) nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ij fLFkr fdlh fcUnq P dh ds Unz ls nw jh Kkr dhft;s ftldk mRds Unzh; dks. k  gksA
a2 b2
x2 y2
(34) nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ij fLFkr ml fcUnq dk mRdsUnzh; dks. k Kkr dhft, ftldh dsUnz ls nwj h 2 gksA
6 2
 3
Ans. (33) r  a 2 cos 2   b 2 sin 2  (34) ± ,±
4 4
iz k pfyd fu:i.k (Parametric Representation) :

2 y2
lehdj.k x = a cos  ,oa y = b sin  ,d lkFk nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 dks iznf'kZr djrs gSA
a b
tgk¡  izkpy gSA /;ku j[ksa fd ;fn P()  (a cos  b sin ) nh?kZo `Ùk ij fLFkr gks] rks Q()  (a cos  a sin
) lgk;d o` Ùk ij fLFkr gks xkA
nh?kZ o `Ù k ij fLFkr nks fcUnq vksa ftuds mRdsUnzh ; dks. k  ,oa  gS ] dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k
x  y  
cos  sin  cos }kjk fn;k tkrk gSA
a 2 b 2 2
x2 y2   5 
mnkgj.k # 23 : nh?kZo `Ùk + =1 ds nks fcUnqvksa P  4  rFkk Q  4  dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k fyf[k,A
25 16    
  5    5    5 
        
x 4 4  y 4 4  4 4 
gy : thok dk lehdj.k cos + . sin = cos
5 2 4 2 2
x  3  y  3  x y
. cos   + . sin   =0  – + =0  5y = 4x
5  4  4  4  5 4
vH;kl dk;Z :
x2 y2
(35) fl) dhft, fd nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ds nks yEcor~ O;klks a ds O;qRØeksa ds oxksZ dk ;ksx vpj gS A fLFkjka d
a2 b2
Hkh Kkr dhft,A
1 1 1 
Ans.   
4  a 2 b2 
nh?kZ o` Ù k ds lkis { k fcUnq dh fLFkfr (Position of a Point w.r.t. an Ellipse) :

x12 y12
  1 > < ;k = 0 ds vuq l kj fcUnq P(x 1, y1), nh?kZ o ` Ùk ds ckgj] vUnj ;k bl ij fLFkr gks xkA
a2 b2
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 24 : ijh{k.k dhft, fd fcUnq P(5, 4), nh?kZo `Ùk + =1 ds vUnj fLFkr gS ;k ckgjA
25 16
25 16
gy : S1  + –1=1+1–1>0  fcUnq P  (5, 4) nh?kZo `Ùk ds ckgj fLFkr gSA
25 16
js [ kk vkS j nh?kZ o ` Ù k (Line and an Ellipse) :

2 y2
ljy js[kk y = mx + c, nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 dks nks okLrfod fcUnqvksa] laikrh fcUnq ;k dkYifud fcUnqvksa ij feyrh
a b
gS ;fn c² <, = ;k > a²m² + b² gksA
2 y2
bl izdkj y = mx + c, nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 dh Li'kZ js[ kk gksxh ;fn c² = a²m² + b².
a b
'kkado ifjPNsn
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 25 : '' ds mu ekuksa dk leqPp; Kkr dhft, ftuds fy, js[ kk 3x – 4y +  = 0 nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ds ckgj
16 9
fLFkr gSA
( 4y   ) 2 y2 2y 2 y 2
gy % nh x;h js[ kk dks nh?kZo `Ùk ds lkFk gy djus ij + =1  – + –1 = 0
9  16 9 9 18 144
pw¡fd js[ kk nh?kZo `Ùk dks nks fHké&fHké fcUnqvksa ij izfrPNsn djrh gSA
vr% mijksDr lehdj.k ds ewy okLrfod rFkk fHkUu&fHkUu gSA
 D0
2 8  2 
 – .  144  1 < 0    (–, –12 2 )  (12 2 , )
(18)2 9  
vH;kl dk;Z :
x2 y2
(36) '' dk og eku Kkr dhft, ftlds fy, js [ kk 2x – y +  = 0 nh?kZ o ` Ùk + = 1 dks Li'kZ djrh gSA
25 9
Ans. =± 109
Li'kZ js [ kk (Tangents) :
x2 y2
(a) iz o .krk :i : m ds lHkh ekuks a ds fy, nh?kZ o ` Ùk + = 1 dh Li'kZ js [ kk y = mx ± a 2m 2  b 2 gSA
a2 b2
x2 y2 xx1 yy1
(b) fcUnq :i : fcUnq (x 1, y1) ij nh?kZ o ` Ùk + = 1 dh Li'kZ js [ kk   1 gS A
2
a 2
b 2
a b2
x2 y2 xcos ysin
(c) iz kpfyd :i : fcUnq (a cos , b sin ) ij nh?kZ o ` Ùk + = 1 dh Li'kZ js [ kk  1 gSA
a2 b2 a b
uks V : (i) nh?kZo `Ùk dh leku m ço.krk okyh nks Li'kZ js[ kk, gS vFkkZr~ fdlh nh xbZ fn'kk esa nks Li'kZ js[ kk;s gksrh gSA
;s Li'kZ js[ kk,¡ O;kl ds fljksa ij nh?kZo `Ùk dks Li'kZ djrh gSA
 cos   
sin 2 
a 2
, b
(ii) fcUnq  rFkk  ij Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dk izfrPNsn fcUnq  cos   gSA
cos 2 
 
 2
(iii) nks lekUrj Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds Li'kZ fcUnqvksa ds mRdsUnzh; dks. kksa esa dk varj gksrk gSA
mnkgj.k # 26 : nh?kZo `Ùk 3x 2 + 4y2 = 12 dh mu Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds lehdj.k Kkr dhft, tks js[ kk x + y = 3. ds yEcor~ gks
gy : Li'kZ js[ kk dh izo .krk = m = 1
x2 y2
fn;k x;k nh?kZo `Ùk gS + = 1 gS A
4 3
'm' ço.krk okyh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k y = mx ± 4m 2  3

 m=1  y= x± 7
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 27 : ,d Li'kZ js[ kk] nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dks iz Fke prq Fkk± ' k es a fcUnq P ij Li'kZ djrh gS rFkk funs Z ' kka d v{kks a
a2 b2
dks Øe'k% A rFkk B ij feyrh gSA ;fn fcUnq P js[ kk AB dks 3 : 1 vuqikr esa foHkkftr djrk gks rks ml fcUnq
P dk fcUnq iFk Kkr dhft,A
'kkado ifjPNsn
gy : ekuk P  ( a cos, b sin)
x y
 Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k cos + sin = 1
a b
A  (a sec, 0) , B  (0, b cosec)
 P js [ kk[k.M AB dks 3 : 1 ds vuq ikr es a vUr% foHkkftr djrk gSA
a 3a
h= :k=
4 cos  4 sin 
a 3a
 cos = sin =
4h 4k
a2 9a 2
vr% fcUnq P dk fcUnq iFk 16 x 2 16 y 2 = 1 
vH;kl dk;Z :
(37) iznf'kZr dhft;s fd nh?kZo `Ùk dh fdlh ukHkh; thok ds fljksa ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kkvksa ds izfrPNsn fcUnq dk
fcUnqiFk] ml ukfHk ds laxr fu;rk gksrh gSA
(38) iznf'kZr dhft;s fd nh?kZo`Ùk dh fdlh pj Li'kZ js[kk ij bldh fdlh ukfHk ls Mkys x;s yEc ds ikn dk fcUnqiFk
ladsUnzh; o`Ùk gksrk gSA
(39) fl) dhft;s fd nh?kZo `Ùk dh fdlh Li'kZ js[kk dk] nh?kZo`Ùk rFkk fu;rk ds e/; dk Hkkx] laxr ukfHk ij ledks.k
cukrk gSA
x2 y2
(40) nh?kZo `Ùk  1 ds ukfHkyEcksa (Latera recta) ds fljksa ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kkvksa ls fufeZr lekUrj
a2 b2
prqHkqZt dk {ks=kQy Kkr dhft;sA
2a 3
Ans. (40)
a2  b2
vfHkyEc (Normals) :
x2 y2 a2 x b2 y
(i) nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ds fcUnq (x 1, y1) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k  = a²  b² gks r k gS A
a2 b2 x1 y1
x2 y2
(ii) nh?kZo `Ùk 2 + = 1 ds fcUnq (acos  , bsin ) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k
a b2
ax. sec   by. cosec  = (a²  b²) gS A
(iii) izo .krk m ds inksa eas vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k y = mx 

a  b m
2 2
gSA
a 2  b 2m 2
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 28 : fcUnq P rFkk Q Øe'k% nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 rFkk lgk;d o` Ùk ij fLFkr la xr fcUnq gS A nh?kZ o ` Ùk ds fcUnq
a2 b2
P ij vfHkyEc CQ dks fcUnq R ij feyrk gS ] tgk¡ C nh?kZ o ` Ùk dk ds Unz gS A fl) dhft, fd CR = a + b.
gy : ekuk P  (acos , b sin)  Q  (a cos, a sin)
fcUnq P ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k
(a sec) x – (b cosec ) y = a2 – b2 ..........(i)
CQ dk lehdj.k y = tan . x .........(ii)
lehdj.k (i) rFkk (ii) dks gy djus ij]
(a – b) x = (a2 – b2) cos
 x = (a + b) cos, & y = (a + b) sin
 R  ((a + b) cos, (a + b) sin)  CR = a + b
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z %
x2 y2
(41) 'k' ds os eku Kkr dhft;s ftuds fy, js [ kk x + y = k, nh?kZ o ` Ùk 2
 1 dk vfHkyEc gksA
a b2
Ans. k= 
a 2
 b2 
2
a2  b2
Li'kZ js [ kk ;q X e (Pair of Tangents) :

2 y2
fdlh fcUnq (x 1, y1) ls] nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kk ;qXe dk lehdj.k SS1 = T² }kjk fn;k tkrk
a b
2 y2 x12 y12 xx1 yy1

gS] tgk¡ S  x2  2 – 1, S1 = 2
 2 – 1 ,oa T  2 + – 1.
a b a b a b2
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 29 : fcUnq (4, 3) ls nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 ij fdruh okLrfod Li'kZ js[kk,¡ [khaph tk ldrh gS \ bu Li'kZ js[kkvksa
16 9
ds lehdj.k rFkk buds chp dk dks. k Kkr dhft;sA
gy : fn;k x;k gS fcUnq P  (4, 3)
x2 y2 16 9
nh?kZo`Ùk S  + –1=0  S1  + –1=1>0
16 9 16 9
 fcUnq P  (4, 3) nh?kZo `Ùk ds ckgj fLFkr gSA vr% fcUnq P (4, 3) ls nks Li'kZ js[ kk;sa [khaph tk ldrh
gS A Li'kZ js[ kk ;qXe dh lehdj.k SS1 = T2
 x2 y2  2

   1 . 1 =  4 x  3y  1
 16 9 
   16 9 
x2 y2 x2 y2 xy x 2y
 + –1= + +1+ – –
16 9 16 9 6 2 3
 – xy + 3x + 4y – 12 = 0
 (4 – x) (y – 3) = 0  x = 4 rFkk y = 3

rFkk buds e/; dks. k =
2
Alternative :
By direct observation
x = 4, y = 3 are tangents.
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 30 : nh?kZo `Ùk  = 1 ij yEcor~ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a ds iz frPNs n fcUnq dk fcUnq iFk Kkr dhft;s A
a2 b2
gy : ekuk nks yEcor~ Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dk izfrPNsn fcUnq P(h, k) gSA
Li'kZ js[ kk ;qXe dk lehdj.k SS1 = T2
 x2 y2   h2 k 2   hx ky 
2
   1    1    1
  a2 b 2   a2 b2  = a2 b2
     
2  h2
x 2  k  1 y2 

 1 + ........ = 0
  2  +  a2  .........(i)
a2  b  b2  
p¡awfd lehdj.k (i) nks yEcor~ js[ kkvksa dks iznf'kZr djrk gS %
1  k2  1  h2 
   1 +   1 = 0
a2  b2  b2  a2 
   
 k 2 – b2 + h2 – a2 = 0  (h, k) fcUnq iFk gS % x 2 + y2 = a2 + b2 gS A
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z %
x2 y2
(42) nh?kZo `Ùk 2 + = 1 dh ukHkh; thok ds fljks a ij [kha ph xbZ Li'kZ js [kkvksa ds iz frPNs n fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk
a b2
Kkr dhft;sA
a
Ans. x=±
e
fu;ked o` Ù k (Director Circle) :
ijLij ledks. k ij feyus okyh Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds izfrPNsn fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk fu;ked o` Ù k dgykrk gSA bl fcUnqiFk
dk lehdj.k x² + y² = a² + b² gS vFkkZr~ og o`Ùk ftldk dsUnz nh?kZo `Ùk dk dsUnz rFkk f=kT;k] nh?kZv{k rFkk y?kqv{k
ds fljksa dks feykus okyh js[ kk dh yEckbZ ds cjkcj gSA
mnkgj.k # 31 : ,d nh?kZo `Ùk nks yEcor~ js[ kkvksa ds chp fQlyrk gSSA iznf'kZr dhft;s fd blds dsUnz dk fcUnqiFk ,d o`Ùk
gksxkA
gy : ekuk fd v/kZ-nh?kZv{k rFkk v/kZ-y?kqv{k dh yEckbZ Øe'k% 'a' rFkk 'b' gS vkSj dsUnz C  (h, k) gSA pwafd nh?kZo `Ùk
nks yEcor~ js[ kkvksa ds e/; fQlyrk gS] blfy, nks yEcor~ Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dk izfrPNsn fcUnq fu;ked o`Ùk ij
fLFkr gksxkA
ekuk fd nks yEcor~ js[ kk,¡ x rFkk y v{k gSA
 ewy fcUnq O  (0, 0) izfrPNsn fcUnq gksxkA
 OC = fu;ked o` Ùk dh f=kT;k
2 2
 h2  k 2 = a  b
 C  (h, k) dk fcUnq iFk x 2 + y2 = a2 + b2 gksxk tks fd ,d o`Ùk gSA
vH;kl dk;Z %
(43) nh?kZo `Ùk x 2 + 4y2 = 4 dh ,d Li'kZ js[ kk nh?kZo `Ùk x 2 + 2y2 = 6 dks fcUnq P rFkk Q ij feyrh gSA fl) dhft;s
fd fcUnq P rFkk Q ij nh?kZo `Ùk x 2 + 2y2 = 6 dh Li'kZ js[ kk,¡ ledks. k cukrh gSA
Li'khZ thok (Chord of Contact) :
x2 y2
fcUnq P(x 1, y1) ls nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ij [kha ph xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dh Li'kZ thok dk lehdj.k
a2 b2
xx1 yy1
T = 0, gS tgk¡ T= 2 + –1
a b2
vH;kl dk;Z %
x2 y2
(44) nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dh vfHkyEc thokvks a ds fljks a ij Li'kZ js[ kkvks a ds iz frPNsn fcUnq dk fcUnq iFk Kkr
a2 b2
dhft;sA
x2 y2
(45) nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dh mu thokvks a ds fljks a ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a ds iz frPNs n fcUnq dk fcUnq iFk
a2 b2
Kkr dhft, tks blds dsUnz ij ledks. k vkUrfjr djrh gSA
a6 b6 x2 y2 1 1
Ans. (44) + 2 = (a2 – b2)2 (45) + = 2 +
x 2 y a 4
b 4
a b2
thok ftldk e/; fcUnq fn;k x;k gks (Chord with a given middle point) :
2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 dh thok ftldk e/; fcUnq (x 1, y1) gS] dk lehdj.k T = S1 }kjk fn;k tkrk gSA
a b
x12 y12 xx1 yy1
tgk¡ S1 = 2
 2 – 1, T 2 + – 1.
a b a b2
'kkado ifjPNsn
vH;kl dk;Z %
x2 y2
(46) nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dh ml thok dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, tks (2, 1) ij lef}Hkkftr gksrh gSA
36 9
Ans. x + 2y = 4
egRoiw . kZ eq [ ; fcUnq %
2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk x2  2 = 1 ds lUnHkZ esa
a b
(1) ;fn nh?kZo `Ùk ftldh ukfHk;k¡ S rFkk S gks] ij dksbZ fcUnq P gS rks  (SP) +  (SP) = 2a.
(2) nh?kZo `Ùk ds fcUnq P ij Li'kZ js[ kk rFkk vfHkyEc] P dh ukHkh; nwfj;ksa ds chp cuus okys cká rFkk vUr% dks. kksa dks
lef}Hkkftr djrh gSA ;g xq.k/keZ nh?kZo`Ùk ds fy, ijkorZu xq. k/keZ dgykrk gS ftlds vuql kj ,d ukfHk ls mRlftZr
gksus okyh fdj.ksa nh?kZo`Ùk dh vkUrfjr lrg ls ijkofrZr gksdj nwljh ukfHk ls xqtjrh gSA bl izdkj ge ;g fu"d"kZ
fudkyrs gS] fd nh?kZo `Ùk ds fdlh fcUnq P ij [khpha x;h Li'kZ js[ kk ij] fdlh ukfHk S ls Mkys x;s yEc ds ikn dks
vU; ukfHk S feykus okyh js[ kk ,oa ukfHk S Mkys x, yEc ds ikn dks ukfHk S ls feykus okyh js[ kk vfHkyEc PG ij
feyrh gS rFkk vfHkyEc dks lef}Hkkftr djrh gSA tcfd 'G' og fcUnq gS tgk¡ vfHkyEc nh?kZv{k dks feyrk gSA
(3) nh?kZo `Ùk dh fdlh Li'kZ js[ kk ij ukfHk;ksa ls Mkys x;s yEcksa ds Hkkxksa dh yEckbZ dk xq. kt b² gS rFkk yEcksa ds ikn fcUnq
blds lgk;d o`Ùk ij fLFkr gSA
(4) nh?kZo `Ùk dh Li'kZ js[ kk dk Li'kZ fcUnq rFkk fu;rk ds chp dk Hkkx lEcfU/kr ukfHk ij ledks. k vUrfjr djrk gSA
(5) ;fn nh?kZo `Ùk ftldk dsUnz C gks ij fLFkr fdlh fcUnq P ij vfHkyEc nh?kZv{k rFkk y?kqv{k dks Øe'k% G rFkk g ij
feyrk gS rFkk CF bl vfHkyEc ij yEc gSa] rks
(i) PF. PG = b² (ii) PF. Pg = a²
(iii) Gg ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnq iFk ,d nw l jk nh?kZ o ` Ùk gks xk ftldh
mRdsUnzrk fn;s x;s nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRØsUnzrk ds leku gksxhA
[ tgk¡ S rFkk S nh?kZ o ` + Ùk dh ukfHk;k¡ gS a A]
(6) ukHkh; nwj h dks O;kl ekudj [khapk x;k o`Ùk lgk;d o`Ùk dks Li'kZ djrk gSA
'kkado ifjPNsn
vfrijoy; (HYPERBOLA)
vfrijoyf;d oØksa dh foKku vkSj rduhdh esa] fo'sk"kr% [kxksyh; vkSj
varfj{k v/;;u ds {ks=kksa esa] fo'ks"k egRo gSA bl v/;k; esa ge bl izdkj ds
oØksa ds xq.k/keksZ dk v/;;u dj jgs gSaA
ifjHkk"kk % ,d vfrijoy; ,d lery esa ml fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gS tks bl
izdkj xeu djrk gS fd bldk ,d fLFkj fcUnq rFkk ,d fLFkj js[kk ls nwfj;ksa
dk vuqikr ¼fcUnq js[kk ij fLFkr ugha gS½ ,d vpj] 1 ls vf/kd gksrk gSA
PS
=e>1, e – mRdsUnzrk
PM
ekud lehdj.k vkS j ifjHkk"kk, s a (Standard Equation & Definition(s))
x2 y2
vfrijoy; dk ekud lehdj.k 2  2  1 gS tgk¡ b2 = a2 (e2  1)
a b
b2
• 2
mRds U nz r k (e) : e = 1 + 2
a
• ukfHk;k¡ : S  (ae, 0) & S  ( ae, 0)
a a
• fu;rkvks a ds lehdj.k : x = rFkk x=
e e
• vuq i zL Fk v{k : 2a yEckbZ dk js[kk[k.M AA', ftl ij nksuksa ukfHk;k¡ S vkSj S' fLFkr gksrh gS] vfrijoy; dk
vuqizLFk v{k dgykrk gSA
• la ; q X eh v{k : nks fcUnqvksa B (0,  b) rFkk B (0, b) ds e/; dk js[ kk[k.M BB', ftldh yEckbZ 2b gS]
vfrijoy; dk la; qXeh v{k dgykrk gSA
• eq [ ; v{k : vfrijoy; ds vuqizLFk vkSj la; qXeh v{kksa dks eq[ ; v{k dgrs gSaA
• 'kh"kZ : A (a, 0) vkSj A ( a, 0)
• ukHkh; thok : ukfHk ls xqtjus okyh thok] ukHkh; thok dgykrh gSA
• f}dks f V : vuqizLFk v{k ds yEcor~ thok] f}dksfV dgykrh gSA
• ukfHkyEc (  ) : vuqizLFk v{k ds yEcor~ ukHkh; thok ukfHkyEc dgykrh gSA

2
2b2  C. A.
ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ ()=  = 2a (e2  1) }kjk nh tkrh gS A
a T. A.
'kkado ifjPNsn
uks V : (i) (ukfHkyEc ) = 2 e × (ukfHk dh la xr fu;rk ls nw j h)
2 2 2  2 
 b   b   b  b
(ii) ukfHkyEc ds 'kh"kZ L   ae,  , L   ae,   , M    ae,  , M    ae,  a  gSA
 a   a   a   
• ds U nz : fdlh fcUnq ls xqtjus okyh lHkh thok,sa ml fcUnq ij lef}Hkkftr gksrh gS rks og fcUnq 'kkdao dk dsUnz dgykrk
x2 y2
gSA ewyfcUnq C  (0, 0) vfrijoy;  1 dk dsUnz gSA
a2 b2
lkekU; uks V : p¡wfd vfrijoy; dh ewyHkwr lehdj.k] nh?kZo `Ùk dh ewyHkwr lehdj.k ls dso y b2 ds LFkku ij –b2 ls fHkUu
gSA vr% nh?kZo`Ùk ds cgqr ls xq.k/keks± esa b2 ds fpUg dks cnydj vfrijoy; ds xq. k/keZ izkIr fd, tk ldrs gSA
mnkgj.k # 32 : vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh fu;rk 3x + 4y = 2, ukfHk (1, 2) rFkk mRdsUnzrk 3 gSA
gy : ekuk vfrijoy; ij dksbZ pj fcUnq P (x,y) gSA
P ls fu;rk ij yEc PM [kha pkA
rc ifjHkk"kk ls] SP = e PM
 (SP)2 = e2 (PM)2
2
 3x  4y  2 
 (x – 1)2 + (y – 2)2 = 3  
 5 
tks vfrijoy; dh lehdj.k gSA
mnkgj.k # 33 : vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk Kkr dhft, ftldk ukfHkyEc bldh vuqizLFk v{k dk vk/kk gSA
x2 y2
gy : ekuk vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k 2 – = 1 gS A
a b2
2b 2
rc vuqizLFk v{k = 2a rFkk ukfHkyEc =
a
2b 2 1
iz'ukuql kj = (2a)  2b2 = a2 ( b2 = a2 (e2 – 1))
a 2
3
 2a2 (e2 – 1) = a2  2e2 – 2 = 1  e2 =
2
3 3
 e= . bl izdkj mRdsUnzrk gSA
2 2
la ; q X eh vfrijoy; (Conjugate hyperbola) :

nks vfrijoy; ,d nwl js ds la; qXeh vfrijoy; gksxsa ;fn igys vfrijoy; ds la; qXeh v{k vkSj vuqizLFk v{k nwl js
vfrijoy; ds Øe'k% vuqizLFk vkSj la; qXeh v{k gksA
x2 y2 x2 y2
mnkgj.kkFkZ   1 o    1 , ,d nw l js ds la ; q Xeh vfrijoy; gS A
a2 b2 a2 b2
'kkado ifjPNsn
y2 x2
lehdj.k : – =1
b2 a2
a2
a2 = b2 (e2 – 1)  e= 1
b2
2a 2
'kh"kZ (0,  b) ;  ¼ukfHkyEc½ =
b
uks V : (a) ;fn e1 o e2 ,d vfrijoy; vkSj blds la; qXeh vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk,¡ gks] rks e12 + e22 = 1
(b) ,d vfrijoy; vkSj blds la; qXeh vfrijoy; dh ukfHk;k¡ leo`Ùkh; rFkk oxZ ds 'kh"kZ gksrh gSaA
(c) nks vfrijoy; ,d nwl js ds le:i gksrs gS ;fn mudh mRdsUnzrk,sa leku gksA
(d) nks le:i vfrijoy; ,d nwl js ds cjkcj gksaxs ;fn muds ukfHkyEc leku gksA
(e) ,d vk;rh; vfrijoy; dk la; qXeh vfrijoy; Hkh vk;rh; gksrk gSA
mnkgj.k # 34 : vfrijoy; 16x 2 – 9y2 = – 144 ds vuqizLFk v{k dh yEckbZ] la; qXeh v{k dh yEckbZ] mRdsUnzrk] ukfHk;ksa o
'kh"kks± ds funsZ'kk¡d] ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ rFkk fu;rk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft,A
x2 y2
gy : lehdj.k 16x 2 – 9y2 = –144  – =–1
9 16
x2 y2
;g 2 – = – 1 :i dk lehdj.k gS A
a b2
 a2 = 9, b2 = 16  a = 3, b = 4
vuqizLFk v{k dh yEckbZ : vuqizLFk v{k dh yEckbZ 2b = 8
la; qXeh v{k dh yEckbZ : la; qXeh v{k dh yEckbZ 2a = 6
 a2   9  5
1   1   =
mRdsUnzrk : e =  b2  = 16
    4
ukfHk : ukfHk;ksa ds funsZ'kk¡d (0, + be) vFkkZr~ (0, + 5)

'kh"kZ : 'kh"kks± ds funsZ'kk¡d (0, + b) vFkkZr~ (0, + 4)
2a 2 2(3 )2 9
ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ : ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ = = =
b 4 2
fu;rk dk lehdj.k : fu;rk dk lehdj.k
b 4 16
y=+  y=+  y=+
e (5 / 4) 5
vH;kl iz ' u :
(47) ml vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh ukfHk;k¡ (6, 4) o (– 4, 4) gks rFkk mRdsUnzrk 2 gksA
(48) ml vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr djks ftlds eq[; v{k funsZ'kh v{k gSa rFkk blds ,d 'kh"kZ dh ukfHk;ksa ls
nwj h 9 o 1 bdkbZ gSA
x2 y2
(49) ml vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ftldh mRdsUnzrk 2 gS rFkk ukfHk;k¡ nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dh
25 9
ukfHk;ksa ds lEikrh gSaA
x2 y2 y2 x2
Ans. (47) 12x 2 – 4y2 – 24x + 32y – 127 = 0 (48) – = 1, – =1
16 9 16 9
(49) 3x 2 – y2 – 12 = 0
'kkado ifjPNsn
lgk;d o` Ù k (Auxiliary Circle) :
fn;s x;s fp=k esa ;fn C dks dsUnz o vuqizLFk v{k (T.A.) dks O;kl ekudj [khapk x;k o`Ùk vfrijoy; dk lgk;d o`Ùk
dgykrk gSA ftldk lehdj.k x 2 + y2 = a2 gksrk gSA
fn;s x;s fp=k esa P rFkk Q vfrijoy; o lgk;d o`Ùk ds Þla xr fcUnq ß (Corresponding Points) dgykrs gSaA
iz k pfyd fu:i.k (Parametric representation) :

x2 y2
lehdj.k x = a sec  rFkk y = b tan  vfrijoy;   1 ds iz kpfyd lehdj.k dgykrs gS A tgka ,d
a2 b2
izkpy gSA
uksV % ;fn P()  (a sec  b tan ) vfrijoy; ij gks rks Q()  (a cos  a sin ) lgk;d o`Ùk ij gksxkA
vfrijoy; ij fLFkr nks fcUnqvksa] ftuds mRdsUnz dks . k  o  gS] dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k
x  y   
cos  sin  cos gksrk gSA
a 2 b 2 2
,d fcUnq 'P' dh vfrijoy; ds lkis { k fLFkfr
(Position of a point 'P' w.r.t. a hyperbola) :
x12 y12
jkf'k S1    1 /kukRed] 'kw U; ;k _.kkRed gks xh ;fn fcUnq (x 1, y1) Øe'k% oØ ds vUnj] oØ ij ;k oØ
a2 b2
ds ckgj fLFkr gksA
mnkgj.k # 35 : fcUnq (5, – 4) dh vfrijoy; 9x 2 – y2 = 1 ds lkis{k fLFkfr Kkr dhft,A
gy :  9 (5)2 – (– 4)2 – 1 = 225 – 16 – 1 = 208 > 0,
vr% fcUnq (5,–4) vfrijoy; 9x 2 – y2 = 1 ds vUnj gksxkA
js [ kk vkS j vfrijoy; (Line and a hyperbola) :

x2 y2
js[ kk y = mx + c vfrijoy;  1 ds
 lkis{k Øe'k% thok] Li'kZ js[ kk ;k ckgj gksxh
a2 b2
Øe'k% ;fn c2 > ;k = ;k < a2 m 2  b2 gks xkA
Li'kZ js [ kk (Tangents) :
x2 y2
(i) <ky :i ¼iz o .krk :i½ : y = m x  a 2 m 2  b 2 vfrijoy;  1 dh m izo.krk okyh Li'kZ js[kk gSA
a2 b2
x2 y2 x x1 y y1
(ii) fcUnq :i : vfrijoy;  1 ds fcUnq (x 1, y1) ij Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k 2
 1
a 2
b 2
a b2
x2 y2
(iii) iz k pfyd :i : vfrojoy;  1 ds fcUnq (a sec , b tan ) ij Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k
a2 b2
x sec  y tan 
 1 gSA
a b
'kkado ifjPNsn
  
 cos θ1 θ 2 
  
uks V : (i) fcUnq P(1) o Q(2) ij Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dk izfrPNsn fcUnq  a 2 , btan θ1 θ 2 
   2 
 cos θ1 θ 2 
 2 
(ii) ;fn |1 + 2| = gks ] rks bu fcUnq vks a (1 rFkk 2) ij Li'kZ js [ kk,s a lekUrj gks r h gS a A
(iii) nks lekUrj Li'kZ js [ kk,s a (m iz o .krk okyh) vfrijoy; dks O;kl ds fljks a ij Li'kZ djrh gS A
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 36 : ds fdl eku ds fy, ljy js[ kk 2x + y +  = 0 vfrijoy; – =1 dks Li'kZ djrh gSA
16 9
x2 y2
gy : ;g js[ kk vfrijoy; – = 1 dks Li'kZ djs xh ;fn c2 = a2m 2 – b2
a2 b2
2 = 16 × 4 – 9
2= 55  = 55
vH;kl iz ' u :
(50)  ds fdl eku ds fy, js [ kk y = 2x + vfrijoy; 16x 2 – 9y2 = 144 dks Li'kZ djs xhA
(51) js[ kk 4y = 5x + 7 ds lekukUrj vfrijoy; x 2 – y2 = 1 dh Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds lehdj.k Kkr dhft,A
Ans. (50) =±2 5 (51) 4y = 5x ± 3
vfHkyEc (Normals) :
x2 y2 a2 x b2 y
(a) vfrijoy;  1 ds fcUnq P (x 1, y1) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k % x  y = a2 + b2 = a2 e2
a2 b2 1 1
x2 y2
(b) vfrijoy;  1 ds fcUnq (a sec , b tan ) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k %
a2 b2
ax by
 = a2 + b2 = a2 e2
sec  tan 
(c) izo .krk m ds :i esa vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k % y = mx 

a 2
 b2 m
a 2  b2 m 2
vH;kl iz ' u :
x2 y2
(52) fl) dhft, fd js[ kk x + my – n = 0 vfrijoy; – = 1 dh vfHkyEc gks xh ;fn
a2 b2
a2 b2 (a 2  b 2 ) 2
– =
2 m2 n2
x2 y2
(53) vfrijoy; 2 – = 1 ds ds Unz ls fdlh vfHkyEc ij Mkys x;s yEc ds ikn dk fcUnqiFk Kkr dhft,A
a b2
Ans. (53) (x 2 + y2)2 (a2y2 – b2x 2) = x 2y2 (a2 + b2)2
Li'kZ js [ kk ;q X e (Pair of tangents) :

y 2
fdlh fcUnq (x 1, y1) ls vfrijoy; ax2  b2 = 1 ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kk ;qXe dk lehdj.k SS1 = T² gksrk gSA
2
2 2
x2  y – 1
2 x1 y1 xx1 yy1
tgk¡ S a ; S1 =  –1 ; T 2 – –1
2
b2 a 2
b 2
a b2
'kkado ifjPNsn
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 37 : fcUnq (4, 3) ls vfrijoy; – =1 ij fdruh okLrfod Li'kZ js[ kk,sa [khph tk ldrh gSA mu Li'kZ
16 9
js[ kkvksa dk lehdj.k o muds e/; dks. k Kkr dhft,A
gy : fn;k x;k fcUnq P  (4, 3)
x2 y2 16 9
vfrijoy; S – –1=0  S1  – –1=–1<0
16 9 16 9
 fcUnq P  (4, 3) vfrijoy; ds ckgj fLFkr gSA
 fcUnq P(4, 3) ls nks Li'kZ js[ kk,sa [khaph tk ldrh gSA
Li'khZ ;qXe dk lehdj.k SS1 = T2
 x2 y2  4x 3y 
2
    1 . (– 1) =    1
 16 9 
   16 9 
x2 y2 x2 y2 xy x 2y
 – + +1= + +1– – +
16 9 16 9 6 2 3
4
 3x 2 – 4xy – 12x + 16y = 0   = tan–1  
3
fu;ked o` Ù k (Director circle) :
vfrijoy; dh nks ijLij yEcor~ Li'kZ js[kkvksa ds izfrPNsn fcUnqvksa dk fcUnqiFk fu;ked o`Ùk dgykrk gSA ftldk
lehdj.k x 2 + y2 = a2  b2 gSA
;fn b2 < a2 rks fu;ked o`Ùk okLrfod gksrk gSA
;fn b2 = a2 (vk;rkdkj vfrijoy; ) rks o`Ùk dh f=kT;k 'kwU; gksrh gS vkSj ;g ewyfcUnq ij ,d fcUnq o`Ùk esa ifjofrZr
gks tkrk gSA bl fLFkfr esa dso y dsUnz gh og fcUnq gksrk gS ftlls oØ ij ijLij yEcor~ js[ kk,¡ [khaph tk ldrh
gS A
;fn b2 > a2 rks o`Ùk dh f=kT;k dkYifud gksrh gS vkSj blfy, oØ ij u rks dksbZ o`Ùk vkSj u gh dksbZ yEcor~ Li'kZ
js[ kkvksa dk ;qXe [khapk tk ldrk gSA
Li'kZ thok (Chord of contact) :

x2 y2
fcUnq P(x 1, y1) ls vfrijoy; – = 1 ij [kha ph tkus okyh Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dh Li'kZ thok dk lehdj.k
a2 b2
xx1 yy1
T = 0 gks r k gS A tgk¡ T = 2 – –1
a b2
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 38 : ;fn ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh Li'kZ js[ kk,sa vfrijoy; – = 1 dks fcUnq vks a A o B ij izfrPNs n djrh gS
a2 b2
rks fcUnqvksa A o B ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds izfrPNsn fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk Kkr djksA
gy : ekuk fcUnq P  (h, k) fcUnqvksa A o B ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dk izfrPNsn fcUnq gSA
yk
 Li'kZ thok AB dk lehdj.k xh2 – 2 = 1 .............(i)
a b
tks fd ijoy; y2 = 4ax dks Li'kZ djrh gSA ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k gS
a a
y = mx +  mx – y = – .............(ii)
m m
lehdj.k (i) o (ii) leku gSA
a

m 1 h b2 ak hb 2 ak
 = = m  m= 2 & m = –  =–
 h   k 1 k a b2 ka 2
b2
 2  2 
a   b 
b4
 blfy, fcUnq P dk fcUnqiFk y2 = – .x
a3
'kkado ifjPNsn
thok ftldk e/; fcUnq fn;k x;k g S (Chord with a given middle point) :
y2
vfrijoy; ax2  b2 = 1 dh thok] ftldk e/; fcUnq (x 1, y1) gS] dk lehdj.k T = S1 gksrk gSA
2
x12 y12 xx1 yy1

tgk¡ S1 =  –1 o T – –1
a2 b2 a 2
b2
x2 y2
mnkgj.k # 39 : vfrijoy; – = 1 dh thokvksa ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk Kkr djksA
25 9
gy : ekuk P  (h, k) e/; fcUnq gS A
 ml thok dk lehdj.k ftldk e/;fcUnq P gS
xh yk h2 k2 6x 4y x2 y2
– –1= 2 – 2 –1 – = – –1
a2 b2 a b 25 9 25 9
vH;kl iz ' u :
x2 y2
(54) vfrijoy; – = 1 dh ml thok dk lehdj.k Kkr djks tks fcUnq (2, 1) ij lef}Hkkftr gksrh gSA
36 9
x2 y2
(55) fcUnq P ls vfrijoy; – = 1 ij nks Li'kZ js[kk,sa PA
A o PB [khaph tkrh gS rFkk fcUnq (5, 2) js[ kk[k.M
25 16
AB dks lef}Hkkftr djrk gS rks fcUnq P ds funs Z ' kk¡ d Kkr dhft,A
 375 
Ans. (54) x = 2y (55)  , 12 
 4 
vk;rh; ;k ledks.kh; ;k le vfrijoy; (Rectangular hyperbola (equilateral hyperbola))

vfrijoy;] ftlds vuqizLFk v{k rFkk la;qXeh v{k dh yEckbZ
leku gks] ,d ledks. kh; vfrijoy; dgykrk gSA
ledks. kh; vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk lnSo 2 gksrh gSA
p¡wfd a = b blfy, lehdj.k x2 – y2 = a2
b2
e= 1 = 1 1 = 2
a2
bl fudk; dk nf{k.kkorZ fn'kk esa 45° /kw.kZu vk;rh; vfrijoy; dks vU; :i iznku djrk gSA
a2
tksfd xy = c2 gS] tgk¡ ij c2 =
2
ledks . kh; vfrijoy; (xy = c2) :
'kh"kZ : (c, c) rFkk ( c,  c);
ukfHk;k¡ :  2 c , 2 c rFkk   2 c, 2 c , 
fu;rk,s a : x + y =  2 c
ukfHkyEc (l ) :  = 2 2 c = vuqizLFk v{k = la; qXeh v{k

izkpfyd lehdj.k % x = ct, y = c/t, t  R – {0}
fcUnqvksa P (t1) o Q(t2) dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k % x + t1 t2 y = c (t1 + t2)
x y x
fcUnq P (x 1 , y1) ij Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k %  = 2 rFkk fcUnq P (t) ij Li'kZjs[kk dk lehdj.k % + ty = 2c
x1 y1 t
fcUnq P (t) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k % x t3  y t = c (t4  1)
e/; fcUnq (h, k) okyh thok dk lehdj.k % kx + hy = 2hk
'kkado ifjPNsn
mnkgj.k # 40 : ;fn fdlh f=kHkqt ds 'kh"kZ ,d vk;rh; vfrijoy; ij gSa rks fl) djks fd f=kHkqt dk yEcdsUnz Hkh mlh
vfrijoy; ij gksxkA
gy : ekuk "t1", "t2", "t3" f=kHkqt ABC ds 'kh"kZ gS tks vk;rh; vfrijoy; xy = c2 ij fLFkr gSA
 c  c  c 
 A,B rFkk C ds funs Z ' kk¡ d Øe'k%  ct1,  ,  ct 2 ,  ,  ct 3 ,  gksaxsA
t1  t  t3 
  2   
c(t 3  t 2 ) 1 Y
vc BC dh izo .krk = c (t  t ) t t = – t t c
ct1 ,
2 3 2 3 2 3
A t1
 AD dh iz o .krk = t 2t 3 E c
ct3 ,
'kh"kZyEc AD dh lehdj.k C t3
X X
c O D
y – t = t 2t 3(x – ct 1) c
1 ct2 ,
t2 B
;k t 1y – c = x t 1t 2t 3 – ct 12t 2t 3 .....(1)
blh izdkj 'kh"kZyEc BE dh lehdj.k Y
t 2y – c = x t 1t 2t 3 – ct 1t 22t 2t 3 ......(2)
 c 
(1) o (2) dks gy djus ij yEcds Unz ds funs Z ' kk¡ d   t t t ,ct 1t 2 t 3  iz kIr gks r s gS A
 12 3 
tks fd xy = c2 ij fLFkr gSA
egRoiw . kZ ifj.kke (Important results) :

 ukfHk; nwfj;ksa dk vUrj vpj |PS – PS| = 2a gksrk gSA
x2 y2
 vfrijoy;  1 dh ukfHk ls bldh fdlh Li'kZ js[ kk ij Mkys x, yEc ds ikn dk fcUnqiFk mldk lgk;d
a2 b2
o`Ùk gksrk gSA

vFkkZr~ x 2 + y2 = a2 rFkk bu yEcksa dk xq. kuQy b2 gksrk gSA
P
T
S S
T
 Li'kZ js[ kk }kjk Li'kZ fcUnq rFkk fu;rk ds e/; esa dkVk x;k vUr%[k.M laxr ukfHk ij ledks. k vUrfjr djrk gSA
S
T
'kkado ifjPNsn
 vfrijoy; ds fdlh fcUnq ij [khaps x;s vfHkyEc rFkk Li'kZ js[kk ukfHk; f=kT;kvksa ds chp ds dks.k dks lef}Hkkftr djrh
gSA ;g vfrijoy; ds ijkorZu xq. k/keZ dks ifjHkkf"kr djrk gS ftlds vuql kj ;fn dksbZ izdk'k fdj.k fdlh ,d ukfHk
ij Mkyh tk, rks ;g vfrijoy; ds ckâ; i`"B ls ijkofrZr gksdj nwljh ukfHk ij tkrh gSA vr% ;fn ,d vfrijoy;
rFkk ,d nh?kZo `Ùk leukfHk; gks rks os muds mHk;fu"B fcUnq ij yEcor izfrPNsn djrs gSaA
x2 y2 x2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk  1 rFkk vfrijoy; a2  k 2  = 1 leukfHk; gS vr% (a > k > b > 0) os yEcdks . kh;
a2 b2 k 2  b2
gksxsaA
 ukfHk;ksa ls fdlh vuUrLi'khZ ij [khapk x;k yEc mUgha fcUnqvksa ij feyrk gS tgk¡ ij laxr fu;rk feyrh gS rFkk
mHk;fu"B izfrPNsn fcUnq lgk;d o`Ùk ij fLFkr gksrs gSaA
 
 fdlh f=kHkqt ds ifjxr vk;rh; vfrijoy; ml f=kHkqt ds yEc dsUnz ls xqtjrk gSA ;fn  c t i , ct  i = 1, 2, 3 dks.kh;
 i 
  c 
fcUnq P, Q, R gks] rks yEcdsUnz  t t t , c t1 t 2 t 3  gksxkA
 1 2 3 
mnkgj.k # 41 : fcUnq (5, 0) ls mRlftZr fdj.k vfrijoy; 9x 2 – 16y2 = 144 ij vkifrr gksrh gS ,oa fcUnq P] ftldk Hkqt
8 gS ] ij feyrh gS A iz Fke ijkorZ u ds i'pkr ijkofrZ r fdj.k dk lehdj.k Kkr djks ;fn P iz Fke prq Fkk± ' k
esa gksA
gy : fn;k x;k vfrijoy;
9x 2 – 16y2 = 144 gS a bls fuEu iz dkj fy[k ldrs gS
x2 y2
– =1 ......(1)
16 9
pw¡fd P dk x-funsZ'kk¡d 8 gS
ekuk P dk y-funsZ'kk¡d gSA
 (8,), (1) ij fLFkr gS A
64 2
 – =1
16 9
 2 = 27  =3 3 ( P iz Fke prq Fkk± ' k es a gS )
vr% P ds funsZ'kk¡d (8,3 3 ) gksaxsA

 p¡wfd ijkofrZr fdj.k P (8,3 3 ) ,oa S(–5,0) ls xqtjrh gSA
03 3
 bldk lehdj.k y – 3 3 = (x – 8) gks xkA
58
;k 13y – 39 3 = 3 3 x – 24 3
;k 3 3 x – 13y + 15 3 = 0
Conic Section
 Marked Questions may have for Revision Questions.

 fpfUgr iz ' u nks g jkus ;ks X; iz ' u gS A
OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
oLrq fu"B iz 'u ¼ OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS½
PARABOLA
Section (A) : Elementary Concepts of Parabola
[k.M (A) : ijoy; dk izkjfEHkd fl)kUr
A-1. The equation of the parabola whose focus is ( 3, 0) and the directrix is, x + 5 = 0 is:
ijoy; dk lehdj.k ftldh ukfHk ( 3, 0) rFkk fu;rk x + 5 = 0 gks] gS&
(1) y2 = 4 (x  4) (2) y2 = 2 (x + 4) (3) y2 = 4 (x  3) (4*) y2 = 4 (x + 4)
A-2. If (2, 0) is the vertex & y  axis is the directrix of a parabola, then its focus is:
;fn ijoy; dk 'kh"kZ (2, 0) ,oa fu;rk y–v{k gks] rks mldh ukfHk gS&
(1) (2, 0) (2) ( 2, 0) (3*) (4, 0) (4) ( 4, 0)
A-3. Length of the latus rectum of the parabola 25 [(x  2)2 + (y  3)2] = (3x  4y + 7)2 is:
ijoy; 25 [(x  2)2 + (y  3)2] = (3x  4y + 7)2 ds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gS&
(1) 4 (2) 2 (3) 1/5 (4*) 2/5
A-4. The point on the parabola y2 = 12x whose focal distance is 4, are
 
(1) 2, 3 , 2,  3  
(2*) 1, 2 3 , 1,  2 3  
(3) (1, 2) (4) none of these
ijoy; y2 = 12x ij fLFkr og fcUnq ftldh ukfHk nwj h 4, gS &
 
(1) 2, 3 , 2,  3   
(2*) 1, 2 3 , 1,  2 3 
(3) (1, 2) (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
A-5. The latus rectum of a parabola whose directrix is x + y – 2 = 0 and focus is (3, – 4), is
ml ijoy; dk ukfHkyEc ftldh fu;rk x + y – 2 = 0 rFkk ukfHk (3, – 4) gS] gksxk&
(1) –3 2 (2*) 3 2 (3) 2 2 (4) 3/ 2
A-6. A parabola is drawn with its focus at (3, 4) and vertex at the focus of the parabola y 2  12 x  4 y + 4 =0.
The equation of the parabola is:
,d ijoy; ftldh ukfHk (3, 4) rFkk 'kh"kZ ijoy; y2  12 x  4 y + 4 =0 dh ukfHk ij fLFkr gks] rks ml ijoy;
dk lehdj.k gS&
(1*) x 2  6 x  8 y + 25 = 0 (2) y2  8 x  6 y + 25 = 0
(3) x 2  6 x + 8 y  25 = 0 (4) x 2 + 6 x  8 y  25 = 0
A-7. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the parabola, y 2 = 4x so that one of its
angular point is at the vertex is:
ijoy; y2 = 4x ds vUnj ,d leckgq f=kHkqt ftldk ,d fcUnq ijoy; ds 'kh"kZ ij gks] dh Hkqtk dh yEckbZ gS&
(1*) 8 3 (2) 6 3 (3) 4 3 (4) 2 3
A-8. The ends of latus rectum of parabola x2 + 8y = 0 are

(1) (–4, –2) and (4, 2) (2) (4, 2) and (–4, 2) (3*) (–4, –2) and (4, –2) (4) (4, 2) and (4, –2)
2
ijoy; x + 8y = 0 ds ukfHkyEc ds fljs gSa&
(1) (–4, –2) vkSj (4, 2) (2) (4, 2) vkSj (–4, 2) (3*) (–4, –2) vkSj (4, –2) (4) (4, 2) vkSj (4, –2)
Conic Section
A-9. The equation of the latus rectum of the parabola x2 + 4x + 2y = 0 is

ijoy; x2 + 4x + 2y = 0 ds ukfHkyEc dk lehdj.k
(1) 2y + 3 = 0 (2) 3y = 2 (3*) 2y = 3 (4) 3y = – 2
A-10. Vertex of the parabola 9x2 – 6x + 36y + 9 = 0 is

ijoy; 9x2 – 6x + 36y + 9 = 0 dk 'kh"kZ gS&
 1 2  1 1  1 1  1 1
(1*)  , –  (2)  – , –  (3)  – ,  (4)  , 
3 9  3 2  3 2 3 2
A-11. The focus of the parabola is (1, 1) and the tangent at the vertex has the equation x + y = 1. Then:
(1) length of the latus rectum is 2 2
(2) equation of the parabola is (x  y)2 = 4 (x + y  1)
(3) the co-ordinates of the vertex are (1/2, 1/2)
(4*) All of these
ijoy; dh ukfHk (1, 1) rFkk 'kh"kZ ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k x + y = 1 gks] rks
(1) ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ 2 2 gS A
(2) ijoy; dk lehdj.k (x  y)2 = 4 (x + y  1) gS A
(3) ijoy; dk 'kh"kZ (1/2, 1/2) gS A
(4*) mijksä lHkh
A-12. The focal distance of a point on the parabola y2 = 16 x whose ordinate is twice the abscissa, is
ijoy; y2 = 16 x ij fLFkr ml fcUnq] ftldh dksfV Hkqt dh nqxuh gS] dh ukHkh; nqjh gS&
(1) 6 (2*) 8 (3) 10 (4) 12
A-13. Which one of the following equations parametrically represents equation to a parabolic profile?
fuEufyf[kr izkpfyd lehdj.kksa esa ls dkSulk ,d ijoy; dks iznf'kZr djrk gS&
t
(1) x = 3 cos t; y = 4 sin t (2*) x 2  2 =  2 cos t; y = 4 cos2
2
t t
(3) x = tan t; y = sec t (4) x = 1  sin t ; y = sin + cos
2 2
A-14. The latus rectum of a parabola whose focal chord is PSQ such that SP = 3 and SQ = 2 is given by:
(1*) 24/5 (2)) 12/5 (3) 6/5 (4) none of these
og ijoy; ftldh ukfHk; thok PSQ gSA (tgk¡ SP = 3 rFkk SQ = 2 fn;k gS½ ml ijoy; ds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ
gS &
(1*) 24/5 (2) 12/5 (3) 6/5 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
Section (B) : Position of point /Line, Chord

[k.M (B) : fcUnq/js[ kk dh fLFkfr] thok
B-1_. Point (2,3) lies
(1) In side the parabola y2 = 4x (2*) In side the parabola x2 = 4y
(3) On the parabola y2 = 4x (4) On the parabola x2 = 4y
fcUnq (2,3) fLFkr gS &
(1) ijoy; y2 = 4x ds vUnj (2*) ijoy; x2 = 4y ds vUnj
(3) ijoy; y2 = 4x ds vUnj (4) ijoy; x2 = 4y ij gSA
B-2_. If the point (– 1,) lies in side the parabola x2 = 4(y–1) then range of values of  is
;fn fcUnq (– 1,) ijoy; x2 = 4(y–1) ds vUnj fLFkr gS rc  ds ekuksa dk ifjlj gS &
(1*) (1, 5) (2) (4, 7) (3) (2, 9) (4) (0, 4)
Conic Section
B_3. The length of chord intercepted on the line 2x + y = 2 by the parabola y2 = 4x, is
js[kk 2x + y = 2 ds }kjk y2 = 4x, ij dkVh xbZ thok dh yEckbZ gS &
(1*) 5 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 1
B-4. A variable chord PQ of the parabola, y 2 = 4x is drawn parallel to the line y = x. If the parameters of the
points P & Q on the parabola be p & q respectively, then (p + q) equal to.
ijoy; y2 = 4x dh ,d pj thok PQ js[kk y = x ds lekUrj [khaph x;h gSA ;fn ijoy; dh fcUnq P rFkk Q ds çkpy
Øe'k% p rFkk q gks] rks p + q dk eku gS&
(1) 1 (2) 1/2 (3*) 2 (4) 4
B-5. The length of the chord of the parabola, y 2 = 12x passing through the vertex & making an angle of 60º
with the axis of x is:
(1*) 8 (2) 4 (3) 16/3 (4) none of these
2
ijoy; y = 12x ds 'kh"kZ ls xqtjus okyh rFkk x–v{k ls 60º dks. k fufeZr djus okyh thok dh yEckbZ gS&
(1*) 8 (2) 4 (3) 16/3 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
B-6. If one end of a focal chord of the parabola y 2 = 4x is (1, 2), the other end is
;fn ijoy; y2 = 4x dh ukfHk; thok ds ,d fljs ds funsZ'kkad (1, 2) gks, rks nwljs fljs ds funsZ'kkad gS&
(1*) (1, – 2) (2) (2, 2) (3) (2, 1) (4) (–2, –1)
B-7. In the parabola y2 = 6x, the equation of the chord through vertex and negative end of latus rectum, is
ijoy; y2 = 6x esa 'kh"kZ o ukfHkyEc ds _.kkRed fljs ls tkus okyh thok dk lehdj.k
(1) y = 2x (2*) y + 2x = 0 (3) y + 3x = 0 (4) x + 2y = 0
Section-(C) : Tangent of Parabola

[k.M (C) : ijoy; dh Li'kZ js[ kk,sa
C-1_. The value  such that line y = x +  is tangent to the parabola y2 = 8x
 ds eku gksxsa tcfd y = x +  ijoy; y2 = 8x dh Li'kZ js[kk gS &
(1*) 2 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 8
 1
C-2. If y = 2 x  3 is a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4a  x   , then ' a ' is equal to:
 3
1
;fn y = 2 x  3 ijoy; y2 = 4a  x  dh Li'kZ js[ kk gks] rks a dk eku gS&
 3
14  14
(1) 1 (2)  1 (3) (4*)
3 3
C-3. The equation of the tangent to the parabola y = (x  3)2 parallel to the chord joining the points
(3, 0) and (4, 1) is:
fcUnq (3, 0) rFkk (4, 1) dks feykus okyh thok ds lekUrj ijoy; y = (x  3)2 dh Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k gS&
(1) 2 x  2 y + 6 = 0 (2) 2 y  2 x + 6 = 0 (3) 4 y  4 x + 11 = 0 (4*) 4 x  4 y = 13
y x
C-4_. The value of a such that line = – 1 is tangent to the parabola y2 = 6x , parallel to the line x + y =
a3 a
4.
y x
a dk eku tcfd = – 1 ijoy; y2 = 6x dh Li'kZ js[kk gS tks js[kk x + y = 4 ds lekUrj gSA
a3 a
3
(1) – 4 (2) – 3 (3*) – (4) – 2
2
Conic Section
C-5. The tangent drawn at any point P to the parabola y2 = 4ax meets the directrix at the point K, then angle which
KP subtends at its focus is
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ds fdlh fcUnq P ls [khaph Li'kZ js[kk,¡ fu;rk ds fcUnq K ij feyrh gS] rc KP }kjk bldh ukfHk ij vUrfjr
dks.k gksxk&
(1) 30º (2) 45º (3) 60º (4*) 90º
C-6. Equation of a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 12x which make an angle of 45° with line y = 3x + 77 is
ijoy; y2 = 12x dh Li'kZ js[ kk tks js[ kk y = 3x + 77 ls 45º dk dks. k cukrh gS] dk lehdj.k gS&
(1) 2x – 4y + 3 = 0 (2) x + 2y + 12 = 0 (3*) 4x + 2y + 3 = 0 (4) 2x + y – 12 = 0
C-7. The point where the tangent to the parabola y 2 = 7x which is parallel to the straight line
4y – x + 3 = 0 touches the parabola is
ijoy; y2 = 7x dh ml Li'kZ js[ kk dk Li'kZ fcUnq Kkr dhft, tks ljy js[ kk 4y – x + 3 = 0 ds lekUrj gS&
(1*) (28, 14) (2) (2, 3) (3) (–2, 1) (4) (0, 1)
C-8. The mirror image of the parabola y 2 = 4x in the tangent to the parabola at the point (1, 2) is
ijoy; y2 = 4x dk fcUnq (1, 2) ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kk ds lkis{k izfrfcEc gS&
(1) (x – 1)2 = 4(y – 2) (2) (x + 3)2 = 4(y + 2)
(3*) (x + 1)2 = 4(y – 1) (4) (x – 1)2 = 4 (y – 1)
C-9. The equation of tangent to the parabola y 2 = 9x, which pass through the point (4, 10) is
ijoy; y2 = 9x dh Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, tks fcUnq (4, 10) ls xqtjrh gS&
(1*) 4y = 9x + 4 (2) 4y = x – 36 (3) y = x + 36 (4) 4y = x + 32
Section-(D) : Normal, Pair of tangents, Director circle, Chord of conctact,chord with

given mid point
[k.M (D) : vfHkyEc] Li'khZ;qXe] fu;ked o`Ùk Li'khZthok ftldk e/; fcUnq fn;k x;k gSA
D-1_. The equation of director circle of the parabola y2 = 10(x – 1)
ijoy; y2 = 10(x – 1) dk fu;ked o`Ùk gS
(1) x2 + y2 –2x –4 y + 4 = 0
(2*) 2x + 3 = 0
(3) 2x + 5 = 0
(4) x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 2 = 0
D-2. Equation of the normal to the parabola, y 2 = 4ax at its point (am 2, 2am) is:
(1*) y =  mx + 2am + am 3 (2) y = mx  2am  am 3
3
(3) y = mx + 2am + am (4) none
2 2
ijoy; , y = 4ax ds fcUnq (am , 2 am) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k gS&
(1*) y =  mx + 2am + am 3 (2) y = mx  2am  am 3
3
(3) y = mx + 2am + am (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
D-3. At what point on the parabola y 2 = 4x the normal makes equal angles with the axes?
ijoy; y2 = 4x ds fdl fcUnq ij vfHkyEc v{kksa ls leku dks. k cukrk gS&
(1) (4, 4) (2) (9, 6) (3) (4, – 1) (4*) (1, 2)
D-4. The line 2x + y +  = 0 is a normal to the parabola y 2 = – 8x, then  is

;fn js[ kk 2x + y +  = 0 ijoy; y2 = – 8x dk vfHkyEc gks] rks  dk eku gS&
(1) 12 (2) – 12 (3*) 24 (4) – 24
D-5. The distance between a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4 A x (A > 0) and the parallel normal with gradient
1 is :
ijoy; y2 = 4 A x (A > 0) ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[ kk ftldh izo .krk 1 gks ,oa lekUrj vfHkyEc ds e/; nwj h gS&
(1) 4 A (2*) 2 2 A (3) 2 A (4) 2 A
Conic Section
D-6. If a line x + y = 1 cut the parabola y2 = 4ax in points A and B and normals drawn at A and B meet at C. The
normal to the parabola from C other, than above two meet the parabola in D, then point D is
;fn ljy js[ kk x + y = 1 ijoy; y2 = 4ax dks fcUnq A ,oa B ij feyrh gS rFkk A ,oa B ij [khaps x, vfHkyEc fcUnq
C ij feyrs gS A fcUnq C ij [kha pk x;k vfHkyEc mijks Dr vfHkyEcks a ds vykok ijoy; dks fcUnq D ij feyrk gks] rks
fcUnq D gS&
(1) (a, a,) (2) (2a, 2a) (3) (3a, 3a) (4*) (4a, 4a)
D-7. Number of distinct normals of a parabola passing through the focus of the parabola is
ijoy; dh ukfHk ls xqtjus okys fofHké vfHkyEcksa dh la[;k gS &
(1) 0 (2*) 1 (3) 2 (4) 3
D-8. If y = 2x + c – 4 is a normal to the parabola y 2 = 4x, then value of ‘c’ is

;fn ijoy; y2 = 4x dk vfHkyEc y = 2x + c – 4 gks] rks ‘c’ dk eku gS &
(1) 8 (2*) – 8 (3) 12 (4) – 12
D-9_. The equation of tangent drawn from the point (2,3) to the parabola y2 = 4x,are
fcUnq (2,3) ds ijoy; y2 = 4x ij [khpha xbZ Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS &
(1) x–y+1 = 0, x+2y = 4 (2) x+y–1= 0, x+2y +4 = 0
(3*) x–y+1= 0, x–2y +4 = 0 (4) x+y–1= 0, x+2y – 4 = 0
D-10. The angle between the tangents drawn from a point ( – a, 2a) to y 2 = 4 ax is
fcUnq ( – a, 2a) ls ijoy; y2 = 4 ax ij [khaps x, Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds chp dk dks. k gS&
   
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
4 2 3 6
D-11. The line 4x  7y + 10 = 0 intersects the parabola, y 2 = 4x at the points A & B. The co-ordinates of the
point of intersection of the tangents drawn at the points A & B are :
js[kk 4x  7y + 10 = 0, ijoy; y2 = 4x dks fcUnq A rFkk B ij çfrPNsn djrh gSA fcUnq A rFkk B ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ
js[ kkvksa ds çfrPNsnu fcUnq ds funsZ'kkad gS&
 7 5  5 7  5 7  7 5
(1)  ,  (2)   ,  (3*)  ,  (4)   , 
 2 2  2 2  2 2  2 2
D-12. The circles on focal radii of a parabola as diameter touch:

(1*) the tangent at the vertex (2) the axis
(3) the directrix (4) none of these
;fn ijoy; dh ukfHk; f=kT;k o`Ùk dk O;kl gks] rks og Li'kZ djrk gS&
(1*) 'kh"kZ ij [kha ph xbZ Li'kZ js [ kk dks (2) v{k dks
(3) fu;rk dks (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
D-13. A circle described on any focal chord of the parabola, y 2 = 4ax as its diameter will touch
(1) the axis of the parabola
(2*) the directrix of the parabola
(3) the tangent drawn at the vertex of the parabola
(4) latus rectum
ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh ukfHk; thok dks O;kl ekudj [khapk x;k o`Ùk Li'kZ djsxk &
(1) ijoy; dh v{k dks (2*) ijoy; dh fu;rk dks
(3) ijoy; ds 'kh"kZ ij [kha ph xbZ Li'kZ js [ kk dks (4) ukfHkyEc dks
D-14. The feet of the perpendicular drawn from focus upon any tangent to the parabola,
y = x 2  2x  3 lies on
ijoy; y = x 2  2x  3 dh fdlh Li'kZ js[ kk ij ukfHk ls [khaps x, vfHkyEc dk ikn fLFkr gS&
(1*) y + 4 = 0 (2) y = 0 (3) y = – 2 (4) y + 1 = 0
Conic Section
D-15. The locus of the middle points of the focal chords of the parabola, y 2 = 4x is:
(1) y2 = x  1 (2*) y2 = 2 (x  1) (3) y2 = 2 (1  x) (4) none of these
2
ijoy; y = 4x dh ukHkh; thok ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gS&
(1) y2 = x  1 (2*) y2 = 2 (x  1) (3) y2 = 2 (1  x) (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
D-16_. The equaton of chord of parabola y2=4x whose midpoint is (2,2)

ijoy; y2 = 4x dh thok dk lehdj.k gksxk ftldk e/; fcUnq (2,2) gS &
(1) 2x – 2y + 5= 0 (2*) y=x
(3) 2y + 2x + 5= 0 (4) 2y – 2x + 5= 0
ELLIPSE
Section (A) : Standard
[k.M (A) : ekud
x2 y 2
A-1_. Eccentricity of the conic   1 is
4 9
x2 y2
'kkado   1 dh mRdsUnzrk gS &
4 9
2 5 7 1
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
3 3 3 2
x2 y 2
A-2_. The focii of the ellipse   1 are
25 9
x2 y 2
nh?kZo`Ùk   1 dh ukfHk;ka gS &
25 9
(1*) (±4, 0) (2) (±3,0) (3) (± 5,0) (4) (±2,0)
2 2
(x  y – 1) (x – y  2)
A-3_. Find the centre of the ellipse + =1
2 3
(x  y – 1)2 (x – y  2)2
nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 dk dsUnz Kkr dhft,A
2 3
 1 3 3 1  1 3  1 3
(1*)  – ,  (2)   (3)  – ,–  (4)  ,– 
 2 2 2 2  2 2  2 2
A-4. The equation of the ellipse whose focus is (1, –1), directrix is the line x – y – 3 = 0 and the eccentricity
1
is , is
2
(1*) 7x 2 + 2xy + 7y2 – 10x + 10y + 7 = 0 (2) 7x 2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 7 = 0
(3) 7x 2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 10x – 10y – 7 = 0 (4) none of these
1
nh?kZo `Ùk ftldh ukfHk (1, –1), fu;rk x – y – 3 = 0 rFkk mRdsUnzrk gks] dk lehdj.k gksxk &
2
(1) 7x 2 + 2xy + 7y2 – 10x + 10y + 7 = 0 (2) 7x 2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 7 = 0
(3) 7x 2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 10x – 10y – 7 = 0 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
A-5_. The centre of ellipse 5x2+5y2– 2xy +8x+8y+2=0 is

nh?kZo`Ùk 5x2+5y2– 2xy + 8x + 8y + 2 = 0 dk dsUnz gS &
(1) (–1, 2) (2) (–2, 1) (3) (–2,–2) (4*) (–1,–1)
A-6. The eccentricity of the ellipse 4x 2 + 9y2 + 8x + 36y + 4 = 0 is

nh?kZo `Ùk 4x 2 + 9y2 + 8x + 36y + 4 = 0 dh mRdsUnzrk gS &
5 3 2 5
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
6 5 3 3
Conic Section
A-7. If distance between the directrices be thrice the distance between the focii, then eccentricity of ellipse
is
;fn fu;rkvksa ds e/; nwj h] ukfHk;ksa ds e/; nwj h dh frxquh gks] rks nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk gS&
1 2 1 4
(1) (2) (3*) (4)
2 3 3 5
A-8. The length of the latus rectum of the ellipse 9x 2 + 4y2 = 1, is

nh?kZo `Ùk 9x 2 + 4y2 = 1 ds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gS &
3 8 4 8
(1) (2) (3*) (4)
2 3 9 9
x y
A-9. The eccentricity of the ellipse which meets the straight line + = 1 on the axis of x and the straight line
7 2
x y
– = 1 on the axis of y and whose axes lie along the axes of coordinates is
3 5
x y x y
,d nh?kZo`Ùk tks ljy js[kk + = 1 dks x v{k ij rFkk ljy js[kk 3 – 5 = 1 dks y v{k ij feyrk gS rFkk ftlds
7 2
v{k funsZ'kh v{kksa ds vuqfn'k gS] dh mRdsUnzrk gS &
6 4 6 2 6 2 6
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
7 7 5 7
x2 y2
A-10. Let P be a variable point on the ellipse + = 1 with focii at S and S. If A be the area of triangle
25 16
PSS, then the maximum value of A is
(1) 24 sq. units (2*) 12 sq. units (3) 36 sq. units (4) none of these
x2 y2
ekuk nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ftldh ukfHk;k¡ S rFkk SgS] ij ,d pj fcUnq P gSaA ;fn f=kHkqt PSSdk {ks=kQy A
25 16
gks] rks A dk vf/kdre eku gS &
(1) 24 oxZ bdkbZ (2) 12 oxZ bdkbZ (3) 36 oxZ bdkbZ (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
A-11. Equation of the ellipse whose foci are (2, 2) and (4, 2) and the major axis is of length 10 is
nh?kZo`Ùk ftldh ukfHk;k¡ (2, 2) vkSj (4, 2) gS rFkk nh?kZv{k dh yEckbZ 10 gks] dk lehdj.k gS &
( x  3)2 ( y  2)2 ( x  3)2 ( y  2 )2
(1) + =1 (2) + =1
4 5 24 25
( x  3 )2 ( y  2)2 ( x  3) 2 ( y  2) 2
(3) + =1 (4*) + =1
25 24 25 24
A-12. The length of the axes of the conic 9x2 + 4y2 – 6x + 4y + 1 = 0, are
'kkado 9x2 + 4y2 – 6x + 4y + 1 = 0 ds v{kksa dh yEckbZ;k¡ gS&
1 2 2
(1) ,9 (2) 3, (3*) 1, (4) 3, 2
2 5 3
x2 y2
A-13. The equation + + 1 = 0 represents an ellipse, if -
2r r 5
x2 y2
lehdj.k + + 1 = 0 ,d nh?kZ o ` Ùk dks iz n f'kZ r djrh gS ;fn &
2r r 5
(1) r > 2 (2*) 2< r < 5 (3) r > 5 (4) r  {2, 5}
Conic Section
A-14. An ellipse has OB as semi-minor axis, F and F are its foci and FBF is a right angle then eccentricity of
the ellipse is
,d nh?kZo`Ùk dk v)Z y?kq-v{k OB, bldh ukfHk;k¡ F vkSj F rFkk FBF ledks.k gks] rks nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk gS &
1 1 2 1
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
2 2 3 3
A-15. The eccentricity of an ellipse in which distance between their focii is 10 and that of focus and corresponding
directrix is 15 is
nh?kZo `Ùk ftldh ukfHk;ksa ds chp dh nwj h 10 rFkk ukfHk ,oa mlds laxr fu;rk ds chp dh nwj h 15 dh mRdsUnzrk gks]
gS &
1 1 1 1
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
3 2 4 2
A-16. If P = (x, y), F 1 = (3, 0), F 2 = (3, 0) and 16x 2 + 25y2 = 400, then PF 1 + PF 2 equals
;fn P = (x, y), F 1 = (3, 0), F 2 = (3, 0) rFkk 16x 2 + 25y2 = 400 gks] rks PF1 + PF2 dk eku gS &
(1) 8 (2) 6 (3*) 10 (4) 12
1
A-17. If focus and corresponding directrix of an ellipse are (3, 4) and x + y – 1 = 0 and eccentricity is then
2
the co-ordinates of extremities of major axis are
1
;fn nh?kZo`Ùk dh ukfHk (3, 4), mlds laxr fu;rk x + y – 1 = 0 vkSj mRdsUnzrk gks] rks nh?kZv{k ds fljks ds funsZ'kkad
2
gS &
(1) (2, 3), (4, 7) (2*) (6, 7), (2, 3) (3) (1, 3), (2, 3) (4) (4, 7), (6, 7)
A-18. The equation, 3x 2 + 4y2  18x + 16y + 43 = C.

(1) cannot represent a real pair of straight lines for any value of C
(2) represents an ellipse, if C > 0
(3) no locus, if C < 0
(4*) all of these
lehdj.k 3x 2 + 4y2  18x + 16y + 43 = C.
(1) C ds fdlh Hkh eku ds fy, okLrfod ljy js [ kk ;q Xe dks iz n f'kZ r ugha djrh gS A
(2) ,d nh?kZ o ` Ùk dks iz n f'kZ r djrk gS ;fn C > 0 gks A
(3) dks bZ fcUnq iFk ugha ;fn C < 0 gks A
(4) mijks Dr lHkh
x2 y2
A-19. The distance of the point '' on the ellipse   1 from a focus is
a2 b2
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk  1 ij fcUnq  dh ,d ukfHk ls nwjh gS &
a2 b 2
(1) a(e + cos ) (2) a(e – cos ) (3*) a(1 + e cos ) (4) a(1 + 2e cos )
A-20. The curve represented by x = 3 (cos t + sin t), y = 4 (cos t – sin t), is
(1*) ellipse (2) parabola (3) hyperbola (4) circle
x = 3 (cos t + sin t), y = 4 (cos t – sin t) }kjk fu:fir oØ gS &
(1) nh?kZo` Ùk (2) ijoy; (3) vfrijoy; (4) o`Ùk
Conic Section
Section (B) : Position of Point, Chord/Tangent of Ellipse
[k.M (B) : fcUnq dh fLFkfr] nh?kZo`Ùk dh thok Li'kZ js[ kk %
x2 y 2
B-1_. The position of point (4, 3) with respect to the ellipse   1 is
8 9
(1*) Out side the ellipse (2) In side the ellipse
(3) On the ellipse (4) On the major axis of ellipse
x2 y 2
nh?kZo`Ùk  1 ds lkis{k fcUnq (4,3) dh fLFkfr gS &
8 9
(1*) nh?kZo`Ùk ds ckgj (2) nh?kZo`Ùk ds vUnj
(3) nh?kZZo`Ùk ij (4) nh?kZo`Ùk ds nh?kZv{k ij
B-2. The position of the point (1, 3) with respect to the ellipse 4x 2 + 9y2 – 16x – 54y + 61 = 0 is
(1) outside the ellispe (2) on the ellipse (3*) on the major axis (4) on the minor axis
nh?kZo `Ùk 4x 2 + 9y2 – 16x – 54y + 61 = 0 ds lkis{k fcUnq (1, 3) dh fLFkfr gS &
(1) nh?kZ o` Ùk ds ckgj (2) nh?kZ o` Ùk ij (3) nh?kZ -v{k ij (4) y?kq-v{k ij
x2 y2
B-3. If the line y = 2x + c be a tangent to the ellipse + = 1, then c is equal to
8 4
x2 y2
;fn js[ kk y = 2x + c nh?kZo `Ùk + =1 dh Li'kZ js[ kk gks] rks c dk eku gS&
8 4
(1) ± 4 (2*) ± 6 (3) ± 1 (4) ± 8
B-4. If the line 3x + 4y =  7 touches the ellipse 3x 2 + 4y2 = 1 then, the point of contact is
;fn js[ kk 3x + 4y =  7 nh?kZo `Ùk 3x 2 + 4y2 = 1 dks Li'kZ djrh gks] rks Li'kZ fcUnq gS &
 1 1   1 1   1 1    1 1 
(1)  ,  (2)  , 
 (3)  ,  (4*)  , 
 7 7   3 3  7 7  7 7
x2 y2
B-5 The equation of tangent to the ellipse + = 1 which passes through a point (15, – 4) is
50 32
(1*) 4x + 5y = 40 (2) 4x + 35y = 200 (3) 4x – 5y = 40 (4) none of these
x2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dh Li'kZ js [ kk tks fcUnq (15, – 4) ls xq tjrh gks ] dk lehdj.k gSs&
50 32
(1*) 4x + 5y = 40 (2) 4x + 35y = 200 (3) 4x – 5y = 40 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
x2 y2
B-6. The tangents at the point P on the ellipse  = 1 and its corresponding point Q on the auxiliary
a2 b2
circle meet on the line :
(1) x = a/e (2) x = 0 (3*) y = 0 (4) x = –a/e
2 2
x y
nh?kZo `Ùk  = 1 ds fcUnq P rFkk blds la xr lgk;d o` Ùk ij fcUnq Q ij [kha ph xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvksa dk iz frPNs n
2
a b2
fcUnq ftl js[ kk ij feyrk gks] og gS &
(1) x = a/e (2) x = 0 (3*) y = 0 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
2 2
x y x y
B-7. If + = 2 touches the ellipse
se + = 1 at a point P, then eccentric angle of P is
a b a2 b2
x y x2 y2
;fn js[ kk + = 2 nh?kZ o ` Ùk 2 + 2 = 1 dks fcUnq P ij Li'kZ djrh gks ] rks P dk mRds Unz h ; dks . k gS &
a b a b
(1) 0 (2*) 45° (3) 60° (4) 90°
Conic Section
B-8. The equation of the tangents drawn at the ends of the major axis of the ellipse 9x2 + 5y2 – 30y = 0, are
(1) y = ± 3 (2) x = ± 5 (3*) y = 0, y = 6 (4) none of these
2 2
nh?kZo`Ùk 9x + 5y – 30y = 0 ds nh?kZ-v{k ds fljksa ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kkvksa ds lehdj.k gSa&
(1) y = ± 3 (2) x = ± 5 (3*) y = 0, y = 6 (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
x2 y2
B-9. The minimum area of triangle formed by the tangent to the ellipse + = 1 and coordinate axes is
a2 b2
a 2  b2
(1*) ab sq. units (2) sq. unit
2
(a  b)2 a 2  ab  b 2
(3) sq. units (4) sq. units
2 3
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk 2 + = 1 dh Li'kZ js[kk ,oa v{kksa ls fufeZr f=kHkqt dk U;wure {ks=kQy gS&
a b2
a 2  b2
(1) ab oxZ bdkbZ (2) oxZ bdkbZ
2
(a  b)2 a 2  ab  b 2
(3) oxZ bdkbZ (4) oxZ bdkbZ
2 3
Section (C) : Normal, Pair of Tangents, Director circle, Chord of conctact, chord with
given mid point of ellipse
[k.M (C) : vfHkyEc] Li'khZ;qXe] fu;ked o` Ùk] Li'kZ thok] thok ftldk e/; fcUnq fn;k x;k gSA
8 y2
C-1. The value of , for which the line 2x – y = – 3 is a normal to the conic x 2 + = 1 is
3 4
8 y2
ds os eku ftuds fy, js [ kk 2x – y = – 3 'kka do x 2 + = 1 dk ,d vfHkyEc gSa &
3 4
3 1 3 3
(1*) ± (2) ± (3) – (4) ±
2 2 4 8
x2 y2
C-2. The eccentric angle of the point where the line, 5x – 3y = 8 2 is a normal to the ellipse + = 1 is
25 9
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 ds fcUnq tgk¡ ij js[kk 5x – 3y = 8 2 vfHkyEc gks] dk mRdsUnzh; dks.k gS&
25 9
   
(1*) (2) (3) (4)
4 2 3 6
x2 y2
C-3. The equation of the normal to the ellipse + = 1 at the positive end of latus rectum is
a2 b2
(1) x + ey + e2a = 0 (2*) x – ey – e3a = 0 (3) x – ey – e2a = 0 (4) none of these
x2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 ds ukfHkyEc ds /kukRed fljs ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k gS &
a2 b2
(1) x + ey + e2a = 0 (2) x – ey – e3a = 0 (3) x – ey – e2a = 0 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
Conic Section
x 2 y2
C-4. If the normal at the point P() to the ellipse  = 1 intersects it again at the point Q(2), then cosis
14 5
equal to
x 2 y2
;fn nh?kZo`Ùk  = 1 ds fcUnq P () ij [khapk x;k vfHkyEc bls iqu% Q(2) ij çfrPNsn djrk gS] rks cos cjkcj
14 5
gS&
2 2 3 3
(1) (2*) – (3) (4) –
3 3 2 2
x2 y2
C-5. If the normal at an end of a latus-rectum of an ellipse +
= 1 passes through one extremity of
2
a b2
the minor axis, then the eccentricity of the ellipse is given by the relation
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 ds ukfHkyEc ds fljs ij vfHkyEc y?kq-v{k ds ,d fljs ls xqtjrk gks] rks nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRdsUnz rk
a2 b2
ds fy, izfrcU/k gS&
(1) e4 + 2e2 – 4 = 0 (2*) e4 + e2 – 1 = 0
3
(3) e4 + e2 – =0 (4) e4 – e2 – 1 = 0
2
x2 y 2
C-6_. The pair of tangents drawn from the point (4,3) to the ellipse   1 is
16 9
x2 y 2
fcUnq (4,3) ls nh?kZo`Ùk  1 dh Li'khZ ;qXe dk lehdj.k gS &
16 9
(1*) 3x + 4y – xy – 12 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 –3x+ 4y – 12 = 0
(3) 4x + 3y + xy + 12 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 + 2xy +2x+2y+1= 0
x 2 y2
C-7_. Equation of director circle of the ellipse  1
25 16
x 2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk   1 ds fu;ked o`Ùk dk lehdj.k gS &
25 16
(1) x2 + y2 = 25 (2) x2 + y2 = 16
2 2
(3*) x + y = 41 (4) x2 + y2 = 9
x2 y 2
C-8. A triangle ABC right angled at 'A' moves so that its sides touch the curve 2 + 2 = 1 all the time. The
a b
locus of the point 'A' is
(1) x 2 + y2 = 2a2 (2) x 2 + y2 = 2b2 (3*) x 2 + y2 = a2 + b2 (4) none of these
x2 y 2
ledks. k f=kHkqt ABC tks fd A ij ledks. k gSa] bl izdkj xfr djrk gS fd bldh Hkqtk,¡ oØ + = 1 dks lnS o
a 2 b2
Li'kZ djrh gks] rks fcUnq A dk fcUnqiFk gS &
(1) x 2 + y2 = 2a2 (2) x 2 + y2 = 2b2 (3) x 2 + y2 = a2 + b2 (4) buea s ls dks bZ ugha
Conic Section
x2 y2
C-9. If 3x + 4y = 12 intersect the ellipse + = 1 at P and Q, then the point of intersection of tangents
25 16
at P and Q is
x2 y2
;fn 3x + 4y = 12 nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dks P rFkk Q ij dkVrh gks] rks P rFkk Q ij Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dk izfrPNsn
25 16
fcUnq gS&
 25 16   25 16 
(1) (0, 1) (2) (1, –2) (3*)  ,  (4)  – , 
 4 3   4 3 
C-10. The angle between the pair of tangents drawn to the ellipse 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 from the point (1, 2) is
fcUnq (1, 2) ls nh?kZo`Ùk 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kkvksa ds e/; dks.k gS&
 12   12 
(1) tan–1   (2) tan–1 (6 5 ) (3*) tan–1  
 (4) tan–1 (12 5 )
 5   5
x2 y2
C-11. If F 1 & F 2 are the feet of the perpendiculars from the focii S 1 & S2 of an ellipse  = 1 on the
5 3
tangent at any point P on the ellipse, then (S 1F 1). (S2F 2) is equal to :
x2 y2
;fn nh?kZo `Ùk  = 1 ds fdlh fcUnq P ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kk ij ukfHk;ksa S1 rFkk S2 ls Mkys x;s yEcksa ds ikn
5 3
F 1 rFkk F 2 gks ] rks (S1F 1). (S2F 2) cjkcj gS &
(1) 2 (2*) 3 (3) 4 (4) 5
( x  1)2 ( y  2) 2
C-12. A ray emanating from (6, 2) is incident on ellipse + = 1 at (4, 6).
45 20
The equation of reflected ray (after 1st reflection) is
( x  1)2 ( y  2) 2
(6, 2) ls fudyus okyh ,d fdj.k nh?kZ o ` Ùk + = 1 ds fcUnq (4, 6) ij vkifrr gksrh gSA
45 20
ijkofrZr fdj.k dk lehdj.k (1st ijkorZu ds ckn) gS &
(1*) x – 2y + 8 = 0 (2) x + 2y + 8 = 0
(3) x + 2y – 8 = 0 (4) x – 2y – 8 = 0
1 
C-13_. The equation of chord of the ellipse 2x2+y2= 2 whose midpoint is  ,1
2 
1 
nh?kZo`Ùk 2x2+y2= 2 dh thok dk lehdj.k gS ftldk e/; fcUnq  2 ,1
 
3 3 5 5
(1*) x+y = (2) 2x+y = (3) x+2y = (4) x+y =
2 2 2 2
HYPERBOLA
Section- (A) : Elementary Concepts of Hyperbola/Conjugate/

Rectangular Hyperbola(xy= c2)
[k.M- (A) : vfrijoy;/ la;qXeh vfrijoy;/vk;rh; vfrijoy; (xy= c2) ds izkjEfHkd fl)kUr
Conic Section
A-1. The eccentricity of the conic represented by x2 – y2 – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0 is

'kkado x2 – y2 – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0 dh mRdsUnzrk gS&
(1) 1 (2*) 2 (3) 2 (4) 1/2
A-2. Which of the following pair, may represent the eccentricities of two conjugate hyperbolas, for all
 (0, /2) ?
lHkh  (0, /2) ds fy, fuEu esa ls dkSulk ;qXe nks la;qXeh vfrijoy; dh mRØsUnzrkvksa dks iznf'kZr dj ldrk gSa&
(1) sin , cos  (2) tan , cot 
(3*) sec , cosec  (4) 1 + sin , 1 + cos 
x2 y2
A-3_. The length of latus rectum of the hyperbola – = 1, is
9 16
x2 y2
vfrijoy; – = 1, ds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gS &
9 16
16 32
(1) (2*) (3) 8 (4) 6
3 3
A-4. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum is 8 and conjugate axis is equal to half the
distance between the focii, is :
4 4 2
(1) (2) (3*) (4) none of these
3 3 3
ml vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk Kkr dhft, ftldk ukfHkyEc 8 gS rFkk la; qXeh v{k ukfHk;ksa ds chp dh nwj h dk
vk/kk gSA
4 4 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
3 3 3
A-5. The equation of the hyperbola whose conjugate axis is 5 and the distance between the focii is 13, is
ml vfrijoy;] ftldk la;qXeh v{k 5 rFkk ukfHk;ksa ds chp dh nwjh 13 gS] dk lehdj.k gksxk&
(1*) 25x2 – 144 y2 = 900 (2) 144 x2 – 25 y2 = 900 (3) 144 x2 + 25 y2 = 990 (4) 25x2 + 144 y2 = 900
A-6. The length of the transverse axis of a hyperbola is 7 and it passes through the point (5, –2). The equation of
the hyperbola is
4 2 196 2 4 2 196 2 4 2 51 2
(1) x – y =1 (2) x – y =1 (3*) x – y =1 (4) None of these
49 51 49 51 49 196
,d vfrijoy; dh vuqçLFk v{k dh yEckbZ 7 gS rFkk og fcUnq (5, –2) ls xqtjrk gSA vfrijoy; dh lehdj.k gS&
4 2 196 2 4 2 196 2 4 2 51 2
(1) x – y =1 (2) x – y =1 (3*) x – y =1 (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
49 51 49 51 49 196
A-7. The equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is x + 2y = 1, focus (2,1) and eccentricity 2 will be
(1*) x2 – 16xy – 11 y2 – 12x + 6y + 21 = 0 (2) 3x2 + 16xy + 15 y2 – 4x – 14y – 1 = 0
(3) 3x2 + 16xy + 11 y2 – 12x – 6y + 21 = 0 (4) None of these
;fn vfrijoy; dh fu;rk x + 2y = 1, ukfHk (2,1) rFkk mRdsUærk 2 gks] rks mldk lehdj.k gksxk&
(1*) x2 – 16xy – 11 y2 – 12x + 6y + 21 = 0 (2) 3x2 + 16xy + 15 y2 – 4x – 14y – 1 = 0
(3) 3x2 + 16xy + 11 y2 – 12x – 6y + 21 = 0 (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
Conic Section
A-8. The vertices of a hyperbola are at (0, 0) and (10, 0) and one of its foci is at (18, 0). The equation of the
hyperbola is
,d vfrijoy; ds 'kh"kZ (0, 0) rFkk (10, 0) vkSj ,d ukfHk (18, 0) gSA vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k gS&
x2 y2 ( x – 5)2 y2 x 2 ( y – 5 )2 ( y – 5)2 y2
(1) – =1 (2*) – = 1 (3) – =1 (4) – =1
25 144 25 144 25 144 25 144
A-9. The equation x2 + 4 xy + y2 + 2x + 4y + 2 = 0

(1) An ellipse (2) A pair of straight lines (3*) A hyperbola (4) None of these
lehdj.k x2 + 4 xy + y2 + 2x + 4y + 2 = 0 fu:fir djrk gS&
(1) ,d nh?kZo`Ùk (2) ,d ljy js[kk;qXe (3*) ,d vfrijoy; (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
A-10. The equation of the directrices of the conic x2 + 2x – y2 + 5 = 0 are

'kkado x2 + 2x – y2 + 5 = 0 dh fu;rkvksa dks lehdj.k gS&
(1) x = ± 1 (2) y = ± 2 (3*) y = ± 2 (4) x = ± 3
A-11. If e and e are the eccentricities of the ellipse 5x 2 + 9y2 = 45 and the hyperbola 5x 2 – 4y2 = 45
respectively then ee =
;fn e o eØe'k% nh?kZo `Ùk 5x 2 + 9y2 = 45 vkSj vfrijoy 5x 2 – 4y2 = 45 dh mRdsUnzrk,¡ gks] rks ee =
(1) – 1 (2*) 1 (3) – 4 (4) 9
x2 y 2
A-12_. The equation of auxilary circle of hyperbola – 1
9 16
x2 y 2
vfrijoy; –  1 dk lgk;d o`Ùk dk lehdj.k gS &
9 16
(1*) x2 + y2 = 9 (2) x2 + y2 = 16 (3) x2 + y2 = 41 (4) x2 + y2 = 7
A-13. An ellipse and a hyperbola have the same centre origin, the same foci and the minor-axis of the one is
1 1
the same as the conjugate axis of the other. If e1, e2 be their eccentricities respectively, then 2
 2=
e1 e 2
(1) 1 (2*) 2 (3) 4 (4) none of these
,d nh?kZo `Ùk vkSj vfrijoy dk dsUnz ewyfcUnq gS] ukfHk;k¡ leku gS vkSj ,d dk y?kq v{k nwljs dk la;qXeh v{k gSA ;fn
1 1
mudh mRdsUnzrk,a Øe'k% e1 vkSj e2 gS] rks 2
 2 =
e1 e 2
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
x2 y2 y2 x2 1 1 
A-14. If e and e are the eccentricities of the hyperbola 2 – 2 = 1 and 2 – 2 = 1, then the point  , 
a b b a  e e 
lies on the circle :
x2 y2 y2 x2 1 1 
;fn e o e vfrijoy; 2 – 2 =1o 2 – 2 = 1 dh mRds Unz r k,¡ ga S ] rks fcUnq  ,  fdl o` Ùk ij fLFkr
a b b a  e e 
gksxk&
(1*) x 2 + y2 = 1 (2) x 2 + y2 = 2 (3) x 2 + y2 = 3 (4) x 2 + y2 = 4
A-15. If P ( 2 sec , 2 tan ) is a point on the hyperbola whose distance from the origin is 6 where P
is in the first quadrant then  =
  
(1*) (2) (3) (4) None of these
4 3 6
Conic Section
vxj P ( 2 sec , 2 tan ) vfrijoy; ij dksbZ fcUnq gS] ftldh ewy fcUnq ls nwj h 6 gS ] tgka ij P iz Fke
prqFkk±'k esa gS] rc  dk eku gksxk&
  
(1*) (2) (3) (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
4 3 6
x 2 ( y – 2)2
A-16. Foci of the hyperbola – = 1 are
16 9
(1*) (5, 2), (–5, 2) (2) (5, 2), (5.–2) (3) (5, 2), (–5, –2) (4) None of these
x 2 ( y – 2)2
vfrijoy; – = 1 dh ukfHk;k¡ gS&
16 9
(1*) (5, 2), (–5, 2) (2) (5, 2), (5.–2) (3) (5, 2), (–5, –2) (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
x2 y2 x2 y2
A-17. The ellipse   1 and the hyperbola   1 have in common
25 16 25 16
(1) centre only (2) centre, foci and directries
(3) Centre, foci and vertices (4*) centre and vertices only
x2 y2 x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk   1 rFkk vfrijoy;  1 esa mHk;fu"V gS&
25 16 25 16
(1) dsoy dsUæ (2) dsUæ] ukfHk vkSj fu;rk,¡
(3) dsUæ] ukfHk vkSj 'kh"kZ (4*) dsoy dsUæ vkSj 'kh"kZ
A-18. A rectangular hyperbola circumscribe a triangle ABC, then it will always pass through its
(1*) orthocenter (2) circumcentre (3) centroid (4) incentre
f=kHkqt ABC ds ifjxr ,d vk;rh; vfrijoy; [khapk tkrk gS rks ;g lnSo xqtjrk gS &
(1) yEcdsUnz ls (2) ifjdsUnz ls (3) ds Unz d ls (4) vUr%ds Unz ls
c
A-19. If the normal at  ct,  on the curve xy = c2 meets the curve again at t, then
 t
;fn oØ xy = c2 ds fcUnq  ct, c  ij vfHkyEc oØ dks iqu% t' ij feyrk gSA rks &
 t
1 1 1 1
(1*) t = – (2) t = (3) t = 2 (4) t2 = –
t3 t t t2
A-20. If (, 4) is the orthocentre of the triangle whose vertices lie on the rectangular hyperbola xy =
16, then  is equal to
;fn f=kHkqt dk yEcdsUnz (, 4) gS ftlds 'kh"kZ vk;rh; vfrijoy; xy = 16 ij fLFkr gS] rks  dk eku gS &
(1) 3 (2*) 4 (3) 12 (4) 8
A-21. If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the focii of a conic passing through the origin then the eccentricity of conic is
;fn (5, 12) o (24, 7) ewy fcUnq ls xqtjus okys ,d 'kkado dh ukfHk;k¡ gSa] rks ml 'kkado dh mRdsUnzrk gSa &
(1) 386 /12 (2) 386 /13 (3) 386 /25 (4*) 386 /38 or 386 /12
Conic Section
Section-(B) : Position of Point/Line, Tangent, Chord of hyperbola
[k.M (B) : fcUnq/ljy js[ kk dh fLFkfr] vfrijoy; dh thok
B-1. The line x + y = a touches the hyperbola x 2 – 2y2 = 18, if a is equal to ± b, then value of | b | is
js[kk x + y = a vfrijoy; x 2 – 2y2 = 18 dks Li'kZ djrh gSA ;fn a, ± b ds cjkcj gS] rks | b | dk eku gS &
(1*) 3 (2) 4 (3) 12 (4) 8
B-2. Equation of a tangent passing through (2, 8) to the hyperbola 5 x 2  y2 = 5 is :

fcUnq (2, 8) ls xqtjus okyh vfrijoy; 5 x 2  y2 = 5 dh Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k gS &
(1*) 3 x  y + 2 = 0 (2) 3 x + y – 14 = 0
(3) 23 x  3 y  22 = 0 (4) 3 x  23 y + 178 = 0
x2 y2
B-3. Tangent at any point on the hyperbola –
= 1 cut the axes at A and B respectively. If the rectangle
a2 b2
OAPB (where O is origin) is completed then locus of point P is given by
a2 b2 a2 b2 a2 b2
(1*) – 2 =1 (2) + 2 =1 (3) 2 – =1 (4) none of these
x2 y x2 y y x2
x2 y2
vfrijoy; 2 – = 1 ds fdlh fcUnq ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kk v{kks a dks Øe'k% fcUnq vksa A rFkk B ij izfrPNs n djrh
a b2
gSA ;fn vk;r OAPB (O ewy fcUnq gSa) iw. kZ fd;k tk,] rks P dk fcUnqiFk gS &
a2 b2 a2 b2 a2 b2
(1) – 2 =1 (2) + 2 =1
=1 (3) –
(4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
2
x2 y x2 y y x2
B-4. The number of possible tangents which can be drawn to the curve 4x2  9y2 = 36, which are perpendicular
to the straight line 5x + 2y 10 = 0 is :
oØ 4x 2  9y2 = 36 ij fdruh Li'kZ js[ kk,a [khaph tk ldrh gS tks fd ljy js[ kk 5x + 2y 10 = 0 ds yEcor~ gSaA
(1*) zero (2) 1 (3) 2 (4) 4
B-5. The equation of the tangent lines to the hyperbola x 2  2y2 = 18 which are perpendicular to the line
y = x are :
vfrijoy; x 2  2y2 = 18 dh Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds lehdj.k tks js[ kk y = x ds yEcor~ gSa &
(1) y = – x + 7 (2) y = x + 3 (3) y = – x – 4 (4*) y = – x ± 3
B-6. Number of non-negative integral values of b for which tangent parallel to line y = x + 1 can be drawn to
hyperbola
x2 y2
 = 1 is
5 b2
x2 y2
js[kk y = x + 1 ds lekUrj vfrijoy;  = 1 dh Li'kZ js[kk [khapus ds fy, b ds v_.kkRed iw.kk±d ekuksa dh la[;k gS &
5 b2
(1) 16 (2*) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
B-7._ An equation of a tangent to the hyperbola, 16x 2 – 25y2 – 96x + 100y – 356 = 0 which makes an

angle with the transverse axis is y = x +  ,  then 2 is
4

vfrijoy; 16x 2 – 25y2 – 96x + 100y – 356 = 0 dh ml Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k tks vuqizLFk v{k ls dks. k
4
cukrh gS] y = x +  gS ] rks 2 =
(1) 16 (2*) 4 (3) 3 (4) 9
Conic Section
x2 y2  
B-8. If (a sec , b tan ) and (a sec, b tan ) are the ends of a focal chord of – = 1, then tan tan
a2 b2 2 2
equals to
x2 y2  
;fn 2 – 2 = 1 dh ukHkh; thok ds vfUre fcUnq (a sec , b tan ) o (a sec, b tan ) gS a ] rks tan tan
a b 2 2
dk eku gS &
e 1 e 1 1 e
(1) (2) (3*) (4) none of these bues a ls dks bZ ugha
e 1 e 1 1 e
B-9. The locus of the middle points of chords of hyperbola 3x 2 – 2y2 + 4x – 6y = 0 parallel to y = 2x is
js[ kk y = 2x ds lekUrj vfrijoy; 3x 2 – 2y2 + 4x – 6y = 0 dh thokvksa ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gS &
(1*) 3x – 4y = 4 (2) 3y – 4x + 4 = 0 (3) 4x – 4y = 3 (4) 3x – 4y = 2
x2 y2
B-10. The chords passing through L(2, 1) intersects the hyperbola – = 1 at P and Q. If the tangents
16 9
at P and Q intersects at R then Locus of R is
(1) x – y = 1 (2*) 9x – 8y = 72 (3) x + y = 3 (4) None of these
2 2
x y
fcUnq L(2, 1) ls xqtjus okyh thok,a vfrijoy; – = 1 dks P rFkk Q ij dkVrh gSA vxj P rFkk Q ls
16 9
xqtjus okyh Li'kZ js[ kk,sa R ij izfrPNsn djrh gS] rc R fcUnqiFk gksxk&
(1) x – y = 1 (2*) 9x – 8y = 72 (3) x + y = 3 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
Section- (C): Normal/Director Circle / Chord of Contact/Chord with given midpoint/

pair of tangent of hyperbola
[k.M (C): vfHkyEc/fu;ked o` Ù k / Li'kZ thok / thok ftldk e/; fcUnq fn;k x;k gS / vfrijoy; dh
Li'khZ ;qXe
C-1. The tangents from (1, 2 2 ) to the hyperbola 16x 2 – 25y2 = 400 include between them an angle equal
to:
fcUnq (1, 2 2 ) ls vfrijoy; 16x 2 – 25y2 = 400 ij [khph x;h Li'kZ js[ kkvksa ds chp dk dks. k gS &
   
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
6 4 3 2
C-2. The number of points from where a pair of perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the hyperbola,
x 2 sec2   y2 cosec2  = 1,  (0, /4), is :
(1) 0 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4*) infinite
mu fcUnqvksa dh la[ ;k tgka ls ijLij yEcor Li'kZ js[ kk ;qXe vfrijoy; x 2 sec2   y2 cosec2  = 1,
 (0, /4) ij [kha ps tk ldrs gS a &
(1) 0 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4) vuUr
C-3. The product of the lengths of the perpendiculars from the two focii on any tangent to the hyperbola
x2 y2
– = 1 is k , then k is
25 3
x2 y2
vfrijoy; – = 1 dh fdlh Li'kZ js[kk ij nks ukfHk;ks ls Mkys x, yEc dh yEckbZ;ksa dk xq.kuQy k gks] rks k
25 3
dk eku gS &
(1) 16 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4*) 9
Conic Section
C-4. The equation to the locus of the feet of the perpendicular from the focus of the hyperbola
4x 2  9y2 = 36 upon any of its tangent has the equation
vfrijoy; 4x 2  9y2 = 36 dh ukfHk ls bldh fdlh Li'kZ js[ kk ij Mkys x;s yEc ikn ds fcUnqiFk dk lehdj.k
gS &
(1*) x 2 + y2 = 9 (2) x 2 + y2 = 4 (3) x 2 + y2 = 1 (4) x 2 + y2 = 16
C-5_. From Point p(2,3) two tangents PA and PB are drawn to the hyperbola x2–y2 – 4x+4y + 16 = 0. The
equation of line AB is
fcUnq p(2,3) ls vfrijoy; x2–y2 – 4x+4y + 16 = 0 ij Li'kZ js[kk,sa [khpha tkrh gS rc js[kk AB dk lehdj.k gS &
(1) y = 3 (2*) y = 2 (3) x = 1 (4) x = 3
C-6_. The equation of chord of the hyperbola x2–2y2 = 2 whose midpoint is (3,1)
vfrijoy; x2–2y2 = 2 dh thok dk lehdj.k gksxk ftldk e/; fcUnq (3,1) gS
(1) 3x –2y+7 = 0 (2) 2x –3y+7 = 0 (3) 2x –3y=7 (4*) 3x –2y=7
Section-(D): Problems involving more than one conic

[k.M (D): ,d 'kkado ls vf/kd ds iz'u
x2 y2
D-1. x  2y + 4 = 0 is a common tangent to y 2 = 4x &  = 1. Then the value of ‘b’ and the other
4 b2
common tangent are respectively
x2 y2
 =1 vkSj y2 = 4x dh mHk;fu"V Li'kZ js[ kk x  2y + 4 = 0 gSA rc b dk eku rFkk vU; mHk;fu"V Li'kZ
4 b2
js[ kk Øe'k% gS &
(1*) b = 3 ; x + 2y + 4 = 0 (2) b = 3; x + 2y + 4 = 0
(3) b = 3 ; x + 2y  4 = 0 (4) b = 3 ; x  2y  4 = 0
D-2_. The equation of common tangent of x2 + y2 = 2 and y2 = 8x is

x2 + y2 = 2 vkSj y2 = 8x dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS &
(1*) x – y + 2 = 0 (2) x + y + 1 = 0
(3) x – y + 1 = 0 (4) x + y – 2 = 0
x2 y 2
D-3_. The line y = x intersects the hyperbola – = 1 at the points P and Q. The eccentricity of ellipse
9 25
5
with PQ as major axis and miror axis of length is
2
x2 y 2
js[kk y = x vfrijoy; – = 1 dks P vkSj Q ij dkVrh gSA PQ dks nh?kZv{k eku dj vkSj y?kqv{k dh yEckbZ
9 25
5
gS] ls cuk;s x;s nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk gS &
2
5 5 5 2 2
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
3 3 9 3
D-4_. The equation of common normal to the circle x2 + y2 – 12x + 16 = 0 and parabola y2 = 4x is
o`Ùk x2 + y2 – 12x + 16 = 0 vkSj ijoy; y2 = 4x ds mHk;fu"B vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k gS &
(1) y = 0 (2) 2x – y = 12 (3) 2x + y = 12 (4*) All of the above mijksDr lHkh
Conic Section
D-5_. Equation of common tangent to circle x2 + y2 = 5 and ellipse x2 + 9y2 = 9 is
o`Ùk x2 + y2 = 5 vkSj nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 9y2 = 9 dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS &
(1) x – y + 10 = 0 (2) x + y = 10
(3) x – y = 10 (4*) All of the above mijksDr lHkh
D-6_. Equation of common tangent to ellipse 5x2 + 2y2 = 10 , and hyperbola 11x2 – 3y2 = 33 is
nh?kZo`Ùk 5x2 + 2y2 = 10 vkSj vfrijoy; 11x2 – 3y2 = 33 dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS &
(1) y = ± 3x ± 21 (2) y = ± x ± 3
(3*) y = ± 4x ± 37 (4) 3x ± y = 12
x2 y2
D-7_. If latus rectum of ellipse   1 is double ordiante of parabola y2 = 4ax value of a is
25 16
x2 y2
;fn nh?kZo`Ùk   1 dk ukfHkyEc] ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh f}dksfV gS rc a dk eku gS &
25 16
64 25 64 64
(1) (2) (3) (4)
25 64 50 75
D-8_. The equation of common tangent to the parabola y2 = 8x and hyperbola 3x2 – y2= 3 is
ijoy; y2 = 8x vkSj vfrijoy; 3x2 – y2= 3 dh mHk;fU"B Li'kZ js[kk ds lehdj.k gS &
(1*) 2x ± y + 1 = 0 (2) 2x ± y – 1 = 0
(3) x ± 2y + 1 = 0 (4) x ± 2y – 1 = 0
Conic Section
 Marked Questions may have for Revision Questions.

 fpfUgr iz'u nksg jkus ;ksX; iz'u gSA
PART - I : OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Hkkx - I : oLrqfu"B iz'u ¼OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS½
PARABOLA (ijoy; )
1. The focus of the parabola x 2 + 2y – 3x + 5 = 0 is
ijoy; x 2 + 2y – 3x + 5 = 0 dh ukfHk gS&
3 15   3 15   3 15   3 15 
(1*)  ,   (2)  2 , 8  (3)  – 2 , 8  (4)  – 2 , – 8 
2 8       
2. Length of the focal chord of the parabola y 2 = 4ax at a distance p from the vertex is:
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ds 'kh"kZ ls p nwj h ij fLFkr ukHkh; thok dh yEckbZ gS&
2a 2 a3 4a3 p2
(1) (2) (3*) (4)
p p2 p2 a
3. If the segment intercepted by the parabola y2 = 4ax with the line x + my + n = 0 subtends a right angle at
the vertex, then
(1*) 4a+ n = 0 (2) 4a+ 4am + n = 0 (3) 4am + n = 0 (4) None of these
;fn ijoy; y2 = 4ax dk js[kk x + my + n = 0 ls vUr% [kf.Mr Hkkx] 'kh"kZ ij 90º dk dks.k vUrjfjr djrk gS] rks
(1*) 4a+ n = 0 (2) 4a+ 4am + n = 0 (3) 4am + n = 0 (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
4. The tangents at the extremities of a focal chord of a parabola

(1) intersect at the vertex (2) are parallel
(3*) intersect on the directrix (4) none of these
ijoy; ds ukfHk; thok ds vfUre fljksa ij [khaph x;h Li'kZ js[ kk;sa&
(1) 'kh"kZ ij iz frPNs n djrh gS A (2) lekUrj gS A
(3*) fu;rk ij iz frPNs n djrh gS A (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
5. The locus of the mid point of the focal radii of a variable point moving on the parabola, y 2 = 4ax is a
parabola whose
(1) Latus rectum is half the latus rectum of the original parabola
(2) Vertex is (a/2, 0)
(3) Directrix is y-axis
(4*) All of these
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ij xfr'khy pj fcUnq dh ukHkh; f=kT;k ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk ,d ,sl k ijoy; gksrk gS %
(1) ftldk ukfHkyEc] fn;s x;s ijoy; ds ukfHkyEc dk vk/kk gks r k gS A
(2) ftldk 'kh"kZ (a/2, 0) gS A
(3) ftldh fu;rk y-v{k gS A
(4) mijksä lHkh
6. Let y2 = 4ax be a parabola and x 2 + y2 + 2 bx = 0 be a circle. If parabola and circle touch each other
externally then:
ekuk fd ,d ijoy; y2 = 4ax gS vkSj ,d o`Ùk x 2 + y2 + 2 bx = 0 gSA ;fn ijoy; vkSj o`Ùk ,d nwl js dks ckg~;
Li'kZ djrs gks] rks&
(1) a > 0, b > 0 (2) a > 0, b < 0 (3) a < 0, b > 0 (4*) ab > 0
Conic Section
7. Length of common chord of the parabolas x2 = 4y and y2 = 4x is
ijoy; y2 = 4x rFkk x2 = 4y dh mHk;fu"V thok dh yEckbZ gS &
(1) 4 (2) 4 3 (3*) 4 2 (4) 2
8. The circle x 2 + y2 = 5 meets the parabola y 2 = 4x at P & Q. Then the length PQ is equal to
o`Ùk x 2 + y2 = 5 ijoy; y2 = 4x ds fcUnq P rFkk Q ij feyrs gSA PQ dh yEckbZ gS&
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4*) 4
ELLIPSE ¼nh?kZ o ` Ùk½

x2 y2
9. The distance between the directrices of the ellipse + = 1 is
36 20
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 dh fu;rkvksa ds e/; nwjh gS&
36 20
(1*) 18 (2) 9 (3) 27 (4) 5
5
10. If the eccentricity of an ellipse be and the distance between its focii be 10, then its latus rectum is
8
5
;fn fdlh nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk gS rFkk bldh ukfHk;ksa ds e/; nwjh 10 gks] rks blds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gS&
8
39 39 39 39
(1*) (2) (3) (4)
4 8 2 2
1
11. If the distance between a focus and corresponding directix of an ellipse be 8 and the eccentricity be ,
2
then length of the semi minor axis is
1
;fn ,d nh?kZo`Ùk dh ukfHk rFkk mlds laxr fu;rk ds e/; nwjh 8 rFkk mRdsUnzrk gks] rks v/kZ y?kq-v{k dh yEckbZ gS&
2
8 4
(1*) (2) (3) 8 3 (4) 4 3
3 3
x2 y2
12. Sum of distances of a point on the ellipse + = 1 from the focii is
9 16
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 ij ,d fcUnq ls ukHkh; nwfj;ksa dk ;ksxQy gS &
9 16
(1) 2 (2) 4 (3*) 8 (4) 16
13. Equation of circle centered at extremity of positive minor axis and passing through the focus
x2 y2
(on positive x-axis) of the ellipse + = 1 is
16 9
x2 y2
o`Ùk ftldk dsUnz /kukRed y?kq-v{k ds fljs ij gks rFkk nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 dh ukfHk ¼/kukRed x-v{k ij gS½ ls
16 9
xqtjrk gks] dk lehdj.k gS&
(1*) x 2 + y2 – 6y – 7 = 0 (2) x 2 + y2 – 6y = 0
(3) x 2 + y2 – 6y – 16 = 0 (4) x 2 + y2 – 3x – 3y = 0
Conic Section
x2 y2
14. If a point P(x 1, y1) lies on ellipse + = 1, then focal distance of P is
9 25
x2 y2
;fn ,d fcUnq P(x 1, y1) nh?kZo `Ùk + =1 ij fLFkr gks] rks P dh ukHkh; nwj h gS &
9 25
4 4 4 4
(1) 4 + y (2) 3 + y (3) 4 – y (4*) 5 – y
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1
15. A latus rectum of an ellipse is a line

(1*) passing through a focus (2) parallel to the major axis
(3) perpendicular to the minor axis (4) all of these
nh?kZo `Ùk dk ukfHkyEc ,d ,sl h js[ kk gS tks &
(1*) ukfHk ls xq tjrh gS A (2) nh?kZ -v{k ds lekUrj gS A
(3) y?kq -v{k ds yEcor~ gS A (4) mijks Dr lHkh
x2 y2
16. + = 1 will represents the ellipse, if r lies in the interval :
r2 – r – 6 r 2 – 6r  5
x2 y2
lehdj.k + = 1 nh?kZo`Ùk dks çnf'kZr djsxk ;fn r dk vUrjky gS&
r2 – r – 6 r 2 – 6r  5
(1) (– , ) (2) (3, ) (3*) (5, ) (4) (1, )
17. The equations of the common tangent to the ellipse, x 2 + 4y2 = 8 & the parabola y 2 = 4x is
nh?kZo `Ùk x 2 + 4y2 = 8 rFkk ijoy; y2 = 4x dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[ kk dk lehdj.k gSa &
(1) 2y – x = 8 (2) 2y + x = 4 (3*) 2y + x + 4 = 0 (4) 2y + x = 0
18. The total number of real common tangents that can be drawn to the ellipse 3x2 + 5y2 = 32 and 25x2 + 9y2 =
450 passing through (3, 5) is
nh?kZo`Ùkksa 3x2 + 5y2 = 32 rFkk 25x2 + 9y2 = 450 dh ,slh okLrfod mHk;fu"V Li'kZ js[kkvksa dh la[;k tks fcUnq (3, 5) ls
xqtjrh gks] gS&
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3*) 0 (4) 3
x2 y2
19. If the mid point of a chord of the ellipse + = 1 is (0, 3), then length of the chord is
16 25
x2 y2
;fn nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 dh ,d thok dk e/; fcUnq (0, 3) gS, rc thok dh yEckbZ gS&
16 25
32 32 8 16
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
3 5 5 5
20. A ray emanating from the point ( 4, 0) is incident on the ellipse 9x² + 25y² = 225 at the point P with
abscissa 3. The equation of the reflected ray after first reflection is
,d fdj.k fcUnq ( 4, 0) ls fudydj nh?kZo `Ùk 9x² + 25y² = 225 ds fcUnq P ftldk Hkqt 3 gS] ij vkifrr gksrh gSA
izFke ijkorZu ds ckn ijkofrZr fdj.k dk lehdj.k gS&
(1*) 12 x + 5 y = 48 (2) 5x  12 y = 48 (3) 12 x  5 y = 24 (4) all of these mijks Dr lHkh
Conic Section
21. Identify the correct statement(s) -
(1*) the equation of the director circle of the ellipse, 5x 2 + 9y2 = 45 is x 2 + y2 = 14.
x2 y 2
(2) the sum of the focal distances of the point (0, 6) on the ellipse + = 1 is 10.
25 36
(3) the point of intersection of any tangent to a parabola & the perpendicular to it from the focus
lies on directrix.
(4) all of these
fuEu esa ls dksSulk dFku lR; gS \
(1) nh?kZ o ` Ùk 5x 2 + 9y2 = 45 ds fu;ked o` Ùk dk lehdj.k x 2 + y2 = 14 gS A
x2 y 2
(2) nh?kZ o ` Ùk + = 1 ij fLFkr fcUnq (0, 6) dh ukHkh; nw fj;ks a dk ;ks xQy 10 gS A
25 36
(3) ijoy; dh fdlh Li'kZ js [ kk rFkk ukfHk ls bl ij Mkys x;s yEc dk iz frPNs n fcUnq fu;rk ij fLFkr gks r k gSA
(4) mijks Dr lHkh
HYPERBOLA (vfrijoy; )
x2 y2
22. The foci of a hyperbola coincide with the foci of the ellipse + = 1. The equation of the hyperbola
25 9
if its eccentricity is 2 is
x2 y2
vfrijoy; dh ukfHk;k¡ nh?kZo`Ùk + = 1 dh ukfHk;ksa ds lEikrh gSaA vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k Kkr dhft, ;fn
25 9
bldh mRdsUnzrk 2 gS&
(1) 3x 2 – y2 – 4 = 0 (2) 3x 2 – y2 – 16 = 0
(3*) 3x 2 – y2 – 12 = 0 (4) – 3x 2 + y2 + 20 = 0
x2 y2
23. The hyperbola   1 passes through the point of intersection of the lines, 7x + 13y  87 = 0 &
a2 b2
5x  8y + 7 = 0 & the latus rectum is 32 2 /5. The value of ab is
2 2
vfrijoy; x  y  1 js[ kkvksa 7x + 13y  87 = 0 vkSj 5x  8y + 7 = 0 ds izfrPNsn fcUnq ls xqtjrk gS rFkk
2 2
a b
ukfHkyEc 32 2 /5 gSA ab dk eku gS&
(1*) 10 2 (2) 5 2 (3) 10 3 (4) 200
24. The one which does not represent a hyperbola is

fuEu esa dkSu vfrijoy; fufnZ"V ugha djrk gS&
(1) xy = 1 (2) x2 – y2 = 5 (3) (x –1) (y – 3) = 3 (4*) x2 – y2 = 0
25. The latus rectum of the hyperbola

9x2 – 16 y2 – 18 x – 32y – 151 = 0 is
vfrijoy; ftldh fu;rk
9x2 – 16 y2 – 18 x – 32y – 151 = 0 dk ukfHkyEc gS&
9 3 9
(1) (2) 9 (3) (4*)
4 2 2
26. The co-ordinates of a focus of the hyperbola 9x2 – 16y2 + 18 x + 32y – 151 = 0 are
vfrijoy; 9x2 – 16y2 + 18 x + 32y – 151 = 0 ds ukfHk;ksa ds funsZ'kkad gSa &
(1) (–1, 1), (4, 1) (2) (6, 1), (–6, 1) (3) (4, 1), (6, 1) (4*) (– 6, 1), (4, 1)
Conic Section
27. The equation of the hyperbola with vertices (3, 0) and (–3, 0) and semi-latusrectum 4, is given by is
4x 2 – 3y2 = 4k, then k =
ml vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k ftlds 'kh"kZ (3, 0) rFkk (–3, 0) rFkk v/kZukfHk yEc 4 gS] 4x 2 – 3y2 = 4k gS] rks k =
(1) 16 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4*) 9
28. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola x 2  y2 sec2  = 5 is 3 times the eccentricity of the ellipse
x 2 sec2  + y2 = 25, then a value of  is
vxj vfrijoy; x 2  y2 sec2  = 5 dh mRdsUnzrk nh?kZo `Ùk x 2 sec2  + y2 = 25 dh mRdsUnzrk dh 3 xquk gS] rc
 dk ,d eku gks xk&
(1) /2 (2) /3 (3*) /4 (4) /6
x2 y2
29. The length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola – = – 1 is
a2 b2
x2 y2
vfrijoy; – = – 1 ds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gS &
a2 b2
2a 2 a2 a2 a
(1*) (2) (3) (4)
b b 2b 2b 2
x2 y2 x2 y2
30. If hyperbola 2 – 2 = 1 passes through the focus of ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 then eccentricity of hyperbola is.
b a a b
x2 y2 x2 y2
;fn vfrijoy; – = 1 nh?kZ o ` Ù k + = 1 dh ukfHk ls xq tjrk gS rks vfrijoy; dh mRds Unz r k gS &
b2 a 2 a 2 b2
(1*) 3 (2) 2 (3) 5 (4) 2
(x  1)2 (y  2)2
31. The co-ordinates of the focii of the hyperbola  = 1 are
9 16
(1) (6, 2) and (–6, 2) (2) (– 6, 2) and (4, 2) (3*) ( 6, 2) and (– 4, 2) (4) (6, – 2) and (–4, 2)
2 2
(x  1) (y  2)
vfrijoy;  = 1 ds ukfHk;ks a ds funs Z ' kka d gS &
9 16
(1) (6, 2) rFkk (–6, 2) (2) (– 6, 2) rFkk (4, 2) (3*) ( 6, 2) rFkk (– 4, 2) (4) (6, – 2) rFkk (–4, 2)
PART - II : MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS
Hkkx-II : fofo/k çdkj ds iz'u (MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS)
Section (A) : ASSERTION/REASONING

Section (A) : dFku@dkj.k (ASSERTION/REASONING)
DIRECTIONS :
Each question has 4 choices (1), (2), (3) and (4) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
(1) Both the statements are true.
(2) Statement- is true, but Statement- is false.
(3) Statement- is false, but Statement- is true.
(4) Both the statements are false.
Conic Section
funs Z ' k% izR;sd iz'u ds 4 fodYi gS A (1), (2), (3) rFkk (4) gS ] ftuesa ls flQZ ,d lgh gS A
(1) nksuks dFku lR; gSA
(2) dFku- lR; gS, ijUrq dFku- vlR; gSA
(3) dFku- vlR; gS, ijUrq dFku- lR; gSA
(4) nksuks dFku vlR; gSA
A-1. STATEMENT-1 : Normal chord drawn at the point (8, 8) of the parabola y2 = 8x subtends a right angle at the
vertex of the parabola.
STATEMENT-2 : Every chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax passing through the point (4a, 0) subtends a right angle
at the vertex of the parabola.
dFku-1 : ijoy; y2 = 8x ds fcUnq (8, 8) ij [khaph x;h vfHkyEc thok ijoy; ds 'kh"kZ ij ledks.k vUrfjr djrh gSA
dFku-2 : ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh izR;sd thok fcUnq (4a, 0) ls xqtjrh gS] tks ijoy; ds 'kh"kZ ij ledks.k vUrfjr djrh gSA
Ans. (3)
A-2. Statement -1 : The circle on any focal distance as diameter touches the director circle
x2 y2
Statement - 2 : If P be any point on the ellipse 2 + = 1 (a < b) with S & S as its focii, then
a b2
(SP) + (SP) = 2b
dFku-1 : nh?kZo`Ùk ij fLFkr fdlh fcUnq dh ukHkh; nwjh dks O;kl ekudj [khapk x;k o`Ùk] nh?kZo`Ùk ds fu;ked o`Ùk
dks Li'kZ djrk gSA
x2 y2
dFku- 2 : ;fn nh?kZo`Ùk 2 + = 1 (a < b) ftldh ukfHk;k¡ S o S gS] ij dksbZ fcUnq P gks] rks
a b2
(SP) + (SP) = 2b
Ans. (3)
x2 y2
A-3. STATEMENT-1 : Total number of tangents of the hyperbola – = 1 that are perpendicular to the line
9 4
5x + 2y – 3 = 0 is 2.
x2 y2
STATEMENT-2 : The equation of tangent to the hyperbola – = 1 in terms of its slope m is
a2 b2
y = mx ± a 2m 2 – b 2 , if a2 m2 – b2 > 0.
x2 y2
dFku-1 : js[ kk 5x + 2y – 3 = 0 ds yEcor~ vfrijoy; – = 1 dh Li'kZ js[ kkvksa dh dqy la[ ;k 2 gSA
9 4
x2 y2
dFku-2 : izo .krk m ds inksa esa vfrijoy; – = 1 dh Li'kZ js [ kk dk lehdj.k y = mx ±
a2 b2
a 2m 2 – b 2 gksrk gS] ;fn a2 m2 – b2 > 0
Ans. (3)
Conic Section
Section (B) : MATCH THE COLUMN
Section (B) : dkWye dks lqesfyr dhft, (MATCH THE COLUMN)
B-1. Column - I Column - II
(P) Number of positive integral values of b for which tangent (1) 16

parallel to line y = x + 1 can be drawn to hyperbola
x2 y2
 = 1 is
5 b2
(Q) The equation of the hyperbola with vertices (3, 0) and (2) 2
(–3, 0) and semi-latusrectum 4, is given by is
4x 2 – 3y2 = 4k, then k =
(R) The product of the lengths of the perpendiculars (3) 4

from the two focii on any tangent to the hyperbola
x2 y2
– = 1 is k , then k is
25 3
(S) An equation of a tangent to the hyperbola, (4) 9
16x 2 – 25y2 – 96x + 100y – 356 = 0 which makes an

angle with the transverse axis is y = x +  ,  then 2 is
4
Codes :
P Q R S
(1) 1 4 3 4
(2) 2 4 3 3
(3*) 2 4 4 3
(4) 4 2 3 1
LrEHk – I LrEHk – II
x2 y2
(P) js[kk y = x + 1 ds lekUrj vfrijoy;  = 1 dh Li'kZ js[kk (1) 16
5 b2
[khapus ds fy, b ds /kukRed iw.kk±d ekuksa dh la[;k gS &
(Q) ml vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k ftlds 'kh"kZ (3, 0) rFkk (–3, 0) (2) 2

rFkk v/kZukfHk yEc 4 gS] 4x 2 – 3y2 = 4k gS] rks k =
x2 y2
(R) vfrijoy; – = 1 dh fdlh Li'kZ js[kk ij nks ukfHk;ks (3) 4
25 3
ls Mkys x, yEc dh yEckbZ;ksa dk xq.kuQy k gks] rks k dk eku gS &
(S) vfrijoy; 16x 2 – 25y2 – 96x + 100y – 356 = 0 dh ml Li'kZ js[ kk (4) 9

dk lehdj.k tks vuqizLFk v{k ls dks. k cukrh gS]
4
y = x +  gS ] rks 2 =
Conic Section
Section (C) : ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTIONS CORRECT
Section (C) : ,d ;k ,d ls vf/kd lgh fodYi çdkj ¼ONE OR MORE THAN ONE OPTIONS CORRECT½
C-1. If one end of a focal chord of the parabola y 2 = 4x is (1, 2), the other end lies on
;fn ijoy; y2 = 4x dh ukfHk; thok ds ,d fljs ds funsZ'kkad (1, 2) gks, rks nwljs fljs ds funsZ'kkad fuEu ij fLFkr gS&
(1*) x 2 y + 2 = 0 (2*) xy + 2 = 0
(3) xy – 2 = 0 (4*) x 2 + xy – y – 1 = 0
C-2. The equation, 3x 2 + 4y2  18x + 16y + 43 = C.

(1*) cannot represent a real pair of straight lines for any value of C
(2*) represents an ellipse, if C > 0
(3*) no locus, if C < 0
(4*) a point, if C = 0
lehdj.k 3x 2 + 4y2  18x + 16y + 43 = C.
(1*) C ds fdlh Hkh eku ds fy, okLrfod ljy js [ kk ;q Xe dks iz n f'kZ r ugh djrh gS
(2*) ,d nh?kZo `Ùk dks iznf'kZr djrk gS] ;fn C > 0
(3*) dksbZ Hkh fcUnqiFk iznf'kZr ugh djrk] ;fn C < 0
(4*) ,d fcUnq dks iznf'kZr djrk gS] ;fn C = 0
C-3. If the distance between the focii of an ellipse is equal to the length of its latus rectum, then eccentricity
of the ellipse is :
;fn nh?kZo `Ùk dh ukfHk;ksa ds e/; nwj h blds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ ds cjkcj gks] rks nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk gS &
5 1 5 1 5 2 2
(1) (2*) (3) (4*)
2 2 2 5 1
C-4. The co-ordinates of a focus of the hyperbola 9x2 – 16y2 + 18 x + 32y – 151 = 0 are
vfrijoy; 9x2 – 16y2 + 18 x + 32y – 151 = 0 ds ukfHk;ksa ds funsZ'kkad gSa &
(1) (–1, 1) (2) (6, 1) (3*) (4, 1) (4*) (– 6, 1)
Conic Section
* Marked Questions may have more than one correct option.

* fpfUgr iz ' u ,d ls vf/kd lgh fodYi okys iz ' u gS -
PART - I : JEE (MAIN) / AIEEE PROBLEMS (PREVIOUS YEARS)

Hkkx - I : JEE (MAIN) / AIEEE ¼fiNys o"kksZ½ ds iz'u
1. The equation of the directrix of the parabola y 2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 is
ijoy; y2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 dh fu;rk dk lehdj.k gS& [AIEEE 2002 (3, –1), 225]
3 3
(1) x = – 1 (2) x = 1 (3) x = – (4*) x =
2 2
x2 y2
2. The radius of the circle passing through the foci of the ellipse  = 1 and having its centre at (0, 3) is
16 9
[AIEEE 2002 (3, –1), 225]
7
(1*) 4 unit (2) 3 unit (3) 12 unit (4) unit
2
x2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk  = 1 dh ukfHk;ksa ls xqtjus okys o`Ùk ftldk dsUæ (0, 3) gks] dh f=kT;k gS&
16 9
[AIEEE 2002 (3, –1), 225]
7
(1*) 4 bdkbZ (2) 3 bdkbZ (3) 12 bdkbZ (4) bdkbZ
2
3. The equation of the ellipse whose foci are (±2, 0) and eccentricity is 1/2, is
[AIEEE 2002 (3, –1), 225]
x2 y 2 x2 y 2 x2 y 2
(1)  1 (2*)  1 (3)  1 (4) none of these
12 16 16 12 16 8
nh?kZo `Ùk ftldh ukfHk;k¡ (±2, 0) rFkk mRdsUærk 1/2 gks] dk lehdj.k gSa &
[AIEEE 2002 (3, –1), 225]
x2 y 2 x2 y 2 x2 y 2
(1)  1 (2*)  1 (3)  1 (4) bues a ls dks bZ ugha
12 16 16 12 16 8
4. The equation of the chord joining two points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) on rectangular hyperbola xy = c2 is
vk;rh; vfrijoy; xy = c2 ij fLFkr nks fcUnqvksa (x1, y1) rFkk (x2, y2) dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k gS&
[AIEEE 2002 (3, –1), 225]
x y x y
(1*) ( x  x )  ( y  y ) = 1 (2) + =1
1 2 1 2 x1  x 2 y1  y 2
x y x y
(3) + =1 (4) + =1
y1  y 2 x1  x 2 y1  y 2 x1  x 2
5. The normal at the point (bt12, 2 bt1) on a parabola meets the parabola again in the point (bt22, 2bt2), then :
ijoy; ds fcUnq (bt12, 2 bt1) ij [khapk x;k vfHkyEc iqu% ijoy; dks fcUnq (bt22, 2bt2) ij dkVrk gks] rks&
[AIEEE 2003 (3, –1), 225]
2 2 2 2
(1*) t2 = – t1 – t (2) t2 = – t1 + t (3) t2 = t1 – t (4) t2 = t1 + t
1 1 1 1
Conic Section
6. The number of parabolas that can be drawn if two ends of the latus rectum are given
[AIEEE 2003 (3, –1), 225]
;fn ukfHkyEc ds nks vUr% fcUnq fn;s x;s gks] rks buls [khaps tkus okys ijoy;ksa dh la[;k gS&
(1) 1 (2*) 2 (3) 4 (4) 3
x2 y2 x2 y2 1
7. The foci of the ellipse + 2 = 1 and the hyperbola – = coincide. Then the value of b2 is :
16 b 144 81 25
[AIEEE 2003 (3, –1), 225]
(1) 1 (2) 5 (3*) 7 (4) 9
x2 y2 x2 y2 1
nh?kZo `Ùk + 2 = 1 rFkk vfrijoy; – = dh ukfHk;k¡ lEikrh gS rks b2 dk eku gS&
16 b 144 81 25
(1) 1 (2) 5 (3*) 7 (4) 9
8. If a  0 and the line 2bx + 3cy + 4d = 0 passes through the points of intersection of the parabolas y2 = 4ax
and x2 = 4ay, then : [AIEEE 2004 (3, –1), 225]
2 2
;fn a  0 rFkk js[kk 2bx + 3cy + 4d = 0 ijoy; y = 4ax rFkk x = 4ay ds izfrPNsnu fcUnq ls tkrh gks] rks&
[AIEEE 2004 (3, –1), 225]
(1*) d + (2b + 3c) = 0 (2) d + (3b + 2c) = 0 (3) d + (2b – 3c) = 0 (4) d2 + (3b – 2c)2 = 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
9. A point on the parabola y2 = 18x at which the ordinate increases at twice the rate of the abscissa, is :
[AIEEE 2004 (3, –1), 225]
2
ijoy; y = 18x ij og fcUnq] ftldh dksfV Hkqt ds nqxqus nj ls o`f) djrh gS] gS&
[AIEEE 2004 (3, –1), 225]
 9 9 9 9
(1) (2,4) (2) (2,–4) (3)   ,  (4*)  , 
 8 2 8 2
1
10. The eccentricity of an ellipse with its centre at the origin is, . If one of the directrices is x = 4, then the
2
equation of the ellipse is : [AIEEE 2004 (3, –1), 225]
(1) 3x2 + 4y2 = 1 (2*) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 (3) 4x2 + 3y2 = 12 (4) 4x2 + 3y2 = 1
1
,d nh?kZo `Ùk ftldk dsUnz ewy fcUnq gks] dh mRdsUnzrk gSA ;fn dksbZ ,d fu;rk x = 4 gks] rks nh?kZo`Ùk dk lehdj.k
2
gS&
(1) 3x2 + 4y2 = 1 (2*) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 (3) 4x2 + 3y2 = 12 (4) 4x2 + 3y2 = 1
11. Let P be the point (1, 0) and Q be a point on the curve y2 = 8x. The locus of midpoint of PQ is
ekuk fcUnq P (1, 0) gS vkSj Q oØ y2 = 8x ij fLFkr gS] rks PQ ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gksxk&
[AIEEE 2005 (3, –1), 225]
(1) x2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (2) x2 + 4y + 2 = 0 (3) y2 + 2x + 2 = 0 (4*) y2 – 4x + 2 = 0
12. An ellipse has OB as semi minor axis, F and F´ as foci and the angle FBF´ is a right angle. Then the
eccentricity of the ellipse is : [AIEEE 2005 (3, –1), 225]
1 1 1 1
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
3 4 2 2
,d nh?kZo`Ùk esa OB v)Z y?kq-v{k gS] F rFkk F´ bldh ukfHk;k¡ rFkk dks.k FBF´ ,d ledks.k gSA rc nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk
gS&
1 1 1 1
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
3 4 2 2
Conic Section
1
13. A focus of an ellipse at the origin. The directrix is the line x = 4 and eccentricity is , then the length
2
of the semi major axis is [AIEEE 2005 (3, –1), 225]
1
nh?kZo `Ùk dh ,d ukfHk ewyfcUnq ij gSA js[ kk x = 4 fu;rk gS rFkk mRdsUnzrk gS] rc v)Z nh?kZ-v{k dh yEckbZ gS&
2
8 2 4 5
(1*) (2) (3) (4)
3 3 3 3
14. The locus of a point P(,) moving under the condition that the line y = x +  is a tangent to the hyperbola
x2 y2
  1 is : [AIEEE 2005 (3, –1), 225]
a2 b2
(1*) a hyperbola (2) a parabola (3) a circle (4) an ellipse
x2 y2
vxj js[kk y = x + vfrijoy;  1 dh Li'kZ js[kk gS rks fcUnq P(,) dk fcUnqiFk gS&
a2 b2
(1*) ,d vfrijoy; (2) ,d ijoy; (3) ,d o`Ùk (4) ,d nh?kZo`Ùk
a3 x 2 a2 x
15. The locus of the vertices of the family of parabolas y = + – 2a is :[AIEEE-2006 (3, –1), 165]
3 2
a3 x 2 a2 x
ijoy; fudk; y = 3
+ – 2a ds 'kh"kksZ dk fcUnqiFk gS&
2
3 35 64 105
(1) xy = (2) xy = (3) xy = (4*) xy =
4 16 105 64
16. In an ellipse, the distances between its foci is 6 and minor axis is 8. Then its eccentricity is :
1 4 1 3
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
2 5 5 5
[AIEEE 2006 (3, –1), 120]
,d nh?kZo `Ùk esa] ukfHk;ksa ds e/; nwj h 6 gS rFkk y?kq v{k dh yEckbZ 8 gS] rc bldh mRdsUnzrk gS&
1 4 1 3
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
2 5 5 5
17. The equation of a tangent to the parabola y2 = 8x is y = x + 2. The point on this line from which the other
tangent to the parabola is perpendicular to the given tangent is [AIEEE 2007 (3, –1), 120]
(1) (–1, 1) (2) (0, 2) (3) (2, 4) (4*) (–2, 0)
ijoy; y2 = 8x dh ,d Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k y = x + 2 gSA bl js[ kk ij og fcUnq] tgk¡ ls ijoy; ij nh xbZ Li'kZ
js[ kk ds yEcor~ nwl jh Li'kZ js[ kk [khaph tkrh gS] gS&
(1) (–1, 1) (2) (0, 2) (3) (2, 4) (4*) (–2, 0)
x2 y2
18. For the hyperbola – = 1, which of the following remains constant when  varies ?
cos2  sin 2 
[AIEEE 2007 (3, –1), 120]
(1) Eccentricity (2) Directrix
(3) Abscissae of vertices (4*) Abscissae of foci
x2 y2
vfrijoy; – = 1 ds fy, fUkEu esa ls dkSu lk '' ds ifjorZu ds lkFk vpj jgrk gS ?
cos 2  sin 2 
(1) mRdsUnzrk (2) fu;rk
(3) 'kh"kks± dk Hkqt (4*) ukfHk;ksa dk Hkqt
Conic Section
19. The ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4 is inscribed in a rectangle alingent with the coordinate axes, which in turn is inscribed
in another ellipse that passes through the point (4, 0). Then the equation of the ellipse is :
nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 4y2 = 4 funsZ'kd v{kksa ls lajsf[kr ,d vk;r ds vUrxZr gS tks Lo;a fcUnq (4, 0) ls tkus okys nwljs nh?kZo`Ùk ds
vUrxZr gSA rc bl nh?kZo`Ùk dk lehdj.k gS % [AIEEE 2009 (4, –1), 144]
2 2 2 2 2 2
(1*) x + 12y = 16 (2) 4x + 48y = 48 (3) 4x + 64y = 48 (4) x2 + 16y2 = 16
20*. Equation of the ellipse whose axes are the axes of coordinates and which passes through the point
2
(–3, 1) and has eccentricity is : [AIEEE 2011, I, (4, –1), 120]
5
2
ml nh?kZo `Ùk] ftlds v{k funsZ'kkad v{k gS] tks fcUnq (–3, 1) ls gksdj tkrk gS rFkk ftldh mRdsUnzrk gS] dk
5
lehdj.k gS :
(1*) 3x 2 + 5y2 – 32 = 0 (2*) 5x 2 + 3y2 – 48 = 0
(3) 3x 2 + 5y2 – 15 = 0 (4) 5x 2 + 3y2 – 32 = 0
21. The equation of the hyperbola whose foci are (–2, 0) and (2, 0) and eccentricity is 2 is given by :
ml vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k] ftldh ukfHk;ka (–2, 0) rFkk (2, 0) gSa rFkk mRdsUnzrk 2 gS] iznÙk gS %
[AIEEE 2011, II, (4, –1), 120]
(1) x2 – 3y2 = 3 (2*) 3x2 – y2 = 3 (3) – x2 + 3y2 = 3 (4) – 3x2 + y2 = 3
22. Statement-1 : An equation of a common tangent to the parabola y2 = 16 3 x and the ellipse 2x2 + y2 = 4
is y = 2x + 2 3 . [AIEEE - 2013, (4, – ¼) 120 ]
4 3
Statement-2 : If the line y = mx + , (m  0) is a common tangent to the parabola y2 = 16 3 x and the
m
ellipse 2x2 + y2 = 4, then m satisfies m4 + 2m2 = 24.
(1) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true.
(2*) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true; statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true; statement-2 is not a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(4) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false.
dFku-1 : ijoy; y2 = 16 3 x rFkk nh?kZo`Ùk 2x2 + y2 = 4 dh ,d mHk;fu"B Li'kZjs[kk dk lehdj.k y = 2x + 2 3 gSA
4 3
dFku-2 : ;fn js[kk y = mx + , (m  0) ijoy; y2 = 16 3 x rFkk nh?kZo`Ùk 2x2 + y2 = 4, dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZjs[kk
m
gS] rks m lehdj.k m4 + 2m2 = 24 dks larq"V djrk gSA
(1) dFku-1 vlR; gS] dFku-2 lR; gSA
(2*) dFku-1 lR; gS, dFku-2 lR; gS; dFku-2 dFku-1 dh lgh O;k[;k gSA
(3) dFku-1 lR; gS] dFku -2 lR; gS] dFku-2, dFku -1 dh lgh O;k[;k ugha gSA
(4) dFku -1 lR; gS] dFku-2 vlR; gSA
Sol. Ans. (2)
23. An ellipse is drawn by taking a diameter of the circle (x – 1)2 + y2 = 1 as its semi-minor axis and a diameter
of the circle x2 + (y – 2)2 = 4 is semi-major axis. If the centre of the ellipse is at the origin and its axes are the
coordinate axes, then the equation of the ellipse is : [AIEEE-2012, (4, –1)/120]
2 2 2 2
o`Ùk (x – 1) + y = 1 ds ,d O;kl dks v/kZ y?kq v{k ysdj rFkk o`Ùk x + (y – 2) = 4 ds ,d O;kl dks v/kZ nh?kZ v{k ysdj
,d nh?kZ o`Ùk [khapk x;kA ;fn nh?kZo`Ùk dk dsanz ewy fcanq ij gS rFkk blds v{k funsZ'kkad v{k gS] rks nh?kZo`Ùk dk lehdj.k
gS :
(1) 4x2 + y2 = 4 (2) x2 + 4y2 = 8 (3) 4x2 + y2 = 8 (4*) x2 + 4y2 = 16
Sol. Ans. (4)
Conic Section
x2 y2
24. The equation of the circle passing through the foci of the ellipse  = 1, and having centre at (0, 3) is
16 9
[AIEEE - 2013, (4, – ¼) ]
x2 y2
nh?kZo`Ùk  = 1, dh ukfHk;ksa ls gksdj tkus okys ml o`Ùk] ftldk dsUnz (0, 3) gS] dk lehdj.k gS:
16 9
(1*) x2 + y2 – 6y – 7 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 6y + 7 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 6y – 5 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 6y + 5 = 0
25. The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the centre of the ellipse x2 + 3y2 = 6 on any tangent to it is:
nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 3y2 = 6 ds dsanz ls bldh fdlh Li'kZ js[kk ij [khaps x, yac ds ikn dk fcUnq iFk gS :
[JEE(Main) 2014, (4, – ¼), 120]
(1*) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2 (2) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2
(3) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2 (4) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2
Sol. Ans. (1)
26. The slope of the line touching both the parabolas y2 = 4x and x2 = – 32y is :
ijoy;ksa y2 = 4x rFkk x2 = – 32y nksuksa dks Li'kZ djus okyh js[kk dh izo.krk gS :
[JEE(Main) 2014, (4, – ¼), 120]
1 2 1 3
(1) (2) (3*) (4)
8 3 2 2
Sol. Ans. (3)
27. The area (in sq.units) of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents at the end points of the latera recta to the
x2 y 2
ellipse   1 , is [JEE(Main) 2015, (4, – ¼), 120]
9 5
27 27
(1) (2) 18 (3) (4) 27
4 2
x2 y 2
nh?kZo`Ùk   1 ds ukfHkyEcksa ds fljksa ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kkvksa }kjk fufeZr prqHkqZt dk {ks=kQy ¼oxZ bdkbZ;ksa esa½ gS&
9 5
[JEE(Main) 2015, (4, – ¼), 120]
27 27
(1) (2) 18 (3) (4) 27
4 2
Ans. (4)
28. Let O be the vertex and Q be any point on the parabola, x2 = 8y. If the point P divides the line segment OQ
internally in the ratio 1 : 3, then the locus of P is [JEE(Main) 2015, (4, – ¼), 120]
(1) x2 = y (2) y2 = x (3) y2 = 2x (4) x2 = 2y
2
ekuk ijoy; x = 8y dk 'kh"kZ O rFkk ml ij dksbZ fcUnq Q gSA ;fn fcUnq P, js[kk[k.M OQ dks 1 : 3 ds vkUrfjd vuqikr
esa ckaVrk gS] rks P dk fcUnqiFk gS& [JEE(Main) 2015, (4, – ¼), 120]
(1) x2 = y (2) y2 = x (3) y2 = 2x (4) x2 = 2y
Ans. (4)
29. Let P be the point on the parabola, y2 = 8x which is at a minimum distance from the centre C of the circle, x2
+ (y + 6)2 = 1. Then the equation of the circle, passing through C and having its centre at P is :
Ekkuk ijoy; y2 = 8x dk P ,d ,slk fcanq gS tks o‘Ùk x2 + (y + 6)2 = 1, ds dsUnz C ls U;wure nwjh ij gS] rks ml o‘`Ùk dk
lehdj.k tks C ls gksdj tkrk gS rFkk ftldk dsUnz P ij gS] gS [JEE(Main) 2016, (4, – 1), 120]%
x
(1) x2 + y2 – x + 4y –12 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – + 2y –24 = 0
4
(3) x2 + y2 –4 x + 9y + 18 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 4x + 8y +12 = 0
Ans. (4)
Conic Section
30. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose length of the latus rectum is equal to 8 and the length of its conju-
gate axis is equal to half of the distance between its foci, is : [JEE(Main) 2016, (4, – 1), 120]
ml vfrijoy;] ftlds ukfHkyac dh yackbZ 8 gS rFkk ftlds la;qXeh v{k dh yackbZ mldh ukfHk;ksa ds chp dh nwjh dh vk/
kh gS] dh mRdsUnzrk gS %
4 2 4
(1) (2) (3) 3 (4)
3 3 3
Ans. (2)
1
31. The eccentricity of an ellipse whose centre is at the origin is . If one of its directrices is x = – 4, then the
2
 3
equation of the normal to it at 1,  is [JEE(Main) 2017, (4, – 1), 120]
 2
1  3
,d nh?kZo‘Ùk] ftldk dsUnz ewy fcUnq ij gS dh mRdsUnzrk gSA ;fn mldk ,d fu;rk x = – 4 gSA rks mlds fcUnq 1, 2 
2  
ij mlds vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k gS :
(1) 2y – x = 2 (2) 4x – 2y = 1 (3) 4x + 2y = 7 (4) x + 2y = 4
Ans. (2)
32. A hyperbola passes through the point P( 2 , 3 ) and has foci at (±2, 0). Then the tangent to this hyperbola
at P also passes through the point : [JEE(Main) 2017, (4, – 1), 120]
,d vfrijoy; fcUnq P( 2 , 3 ) ls gksdj tkrk gS] rFkk mldh ukfHk;k¡ (±2, 0) ij gS] rks vfrijoy; ds fcUnq P ij
[khph xbZ Li’kZ js[kk ftl fcUnq ls gksdj tkrh gS] og gS :
(1) (3 2 , 2 3 )(2) (2 2 , 3 3 )(3) ( 3 , 2) (4) (– 2 , – 3 )
Ans. (2)
PART - II : JEE (ADVANCED) / IIT-JEE PROBLEMS (PREVIOUS YEARS)

Hkkx - II : JEE (ADVANCED) / IIT-JEE ¼fiNys o"kksZ½ ds iz'u
1. The locus of the mid point of the line segment joining the focus to a moving point on the parabola y2 = 4ax is
another parabola with directrix [IIT-JEE 2002, Scr.(3, –1), 90]
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ij fLFkr fdlh pj fcUnq dks ukfHk ls feykus okys js[kk[k.M ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk ,d nwljk ijoy;
gksxk ftldh fu;rk gS&
a a
(A) x = – a (B) x =  (C*) x = 0 (D) x 
2 2
2. The equation of the common tangent to the curves y2 = 8x and xy = – 1 is :[IIT-JEE 2002, Scr.(3, –1), 90]
oØ y2 = 8x rFkk xy = – 1 dh mHk;fu"V Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS&
(A) 3y = 9x + 2 (B) y = 2x + 1 (C) 2y = x + 8 (D*) y = x + 2
Conic Section
3. (i) The area of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents at the end points of latus rectum to the ellipse
x2 y2
 = 1 is : [IIT-JEE-2003, Scr.(3, –1) /84]
9 5
(A) 27/4 sq. units (B) 9 sq. units (C) 27/2 sq. units (D*) 27 sq. units
x2 y2
nh?kZo `Ùk  = 1 ds ukfHkyEc ds fljks a ij [khpha xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a ls fufeZ r prq Hkq Z t dk {ks =kQy gS &
9 5
[IIT-JEE-2003, Scr.(3, –1) /84]
(A) 27/4 oxZ bdkbZ (B) 9 oxZ bdkbZ (C) 27/2 oxZ bdkbZ (D) 27 oxZ bdkbZ
x2  
(ii) Tangent is drawn to ellipse
27
  2

+ y2 = 1 at 3 3 cos  , sin  where    0 ,  . Then the
value of  such that sum of intercepts on axes made by this tangent is minimum is :
[IIT-JEE-2003, Scr.(3, –1) /84]
x2  
nh?kZo `Ùk
27
  2

+ y2 = 1 ij fLFkr fcUnq 3 3 cos  , sin  tgk¡    0 ,  ij Li'kZ js [ kk [kha ph tkrh gS A rc 
dk og eku ftlds fy, bl Li'kZ js[ kk }kjk v{kksa ij dkVsa x;s vUr%[k.Mksa dk ;ksx U;wure gS&
[IIT-JEE-2003, Scr.(3, –1) /84]
   
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
3 6 8 4
4. If tangents are drawn to the ellipse x2 + 2y2 = 2, then the locus of the mid-point of the intercept made by the
tangents between the coordinate axes, is -
;fn nh?kZ o`Ùk x2 + 2y2 = 2 ij Li'kZ js[kka,sa [khaph tkrh gS rks Li'kZ js[kkvksa }kjk funsZ'kh v{kksa ds e/; dkVs x;s vUr%[k.M ds
e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gS& [IIT-JEE-2004, Scr.(3, –1) /84]
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(A) + 2 =1 (B) + 2 =1 (C*) + =1 2 =1 (D) +
x 2 2y 4x 2y 2
2x 4y 2x 2 y2 2
5. A parabola has its vertex and focus in the first quadrant and axis along the line y = x. If the distances of
the vertex and focus from the origin are respectively 2 and 2 2 , then an equation of the parabola is
[IIT-JEE 2006, (3, –1), 184]
fdlh ijoy; dk 'kh"kZ vkSj ukfHk izFke pqrFkk±'k esa gSa vkSj v{k js[ kk y = x ds vuqfn'k gSA ;fn ewy fcUnq ls 'kh"kZ ,oa
ukfHk dh nwj h Øe'k% 2 ,oa 2 2 gks] rks bl ijoy; dk lehdj.k gS &
(A) (x + y)2
=x–y+2 (B) (x – y)2 = x + y – 2
(C*) (x – y) 2 = 8(x + y – 2) (D) (x + y)2 = 8(x – y + 2)
6*. The equation of common tangent(s) to the parabola y = x2 and y = – x2 + 4x – 4 is /are

[IIT-JEE 2006, (5, –1), 184]
2 2
ijoy;ksa y = x vkSj y = – x + 4x – 4 dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS &
(A*) y = 4(x – 1) (B*) y = 0 (C) y = – 4(x – 1) (D) y = – 30 x – 50
x2 y2
7*. If a hyperbola passes through the focii of the ellipse + = 1. Its transverse and conjugate axes
25 16
coincide respectively with the major and minor axes of the ellipse and if the product of eccentricities of
hyperbola and ellipse is 1, then [IIT-JEE-2006, Sec.-2 (5, –1)/184]
x2 y2 x2 y2
(A*) the equation of hyperbola is – =1 (B) the equation of hyperbola is – =1
9 16 9 25
(C*) focus of hyperbola is (5, 0) (D) focus of hyperbola is (5 3 , 0)
Conic Section
x2 y2
;fn ,d vfrijoy; nh?kZo `Ùk + = 1 dh ukfHk;ksa ls xqtjrk gSA mlds vuqizLFk rFkk la;qXeh v{k Øe'k% nh?kZo`Ùk
25 16
ds nh?kZ rFkk y?kq v{kksa ds lkFk lEikrh gSaA ;fn vfrijoy; rFkk nh?kZo `Ùk dh mRdsUnzrkvksa dk xq. kuQy 1 gks] rks&
[IIT - JEE 2006, (5, –1)]
x2 y2 x2 y2
(A) vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k – = 1 gS A (B) vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k – = 1 gS A
9 16 9 25
(C) vfrijoy; dh ukfHk (5, 0) gS A (D) vfrijoy; dh ukfHk (5 3 , 0) gS A
 x2
8. STATEMENT - 1 : The curve y = + x + 1 is symmetric with respect to the line x = 1.
2
because
STATEMENT - 2 : A parabola is symmetric about its axis. [IIT-JEE 2007, Paper-2, (3, –1), 81]
(A*) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is True; Statement - 2 is a correct explanation for
Statement - 1
(B) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is True; Statement - 2 is NOT a correct explanation for
Statement - 1
(C) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is False
(D) Statement - 1 is False, Statement - 2 is True
 x2
dFku - 1 : oØ y = + x + 1, js[kk x = 1 ds lkis{k lefer gSA
2
dkj.k
dFku - 2 : ,d ijoy; mldh v{k ds lkis{k lefer gksrk gSaA
(A) dFku&1 lR; gS] dFku&2 lR; gS ; dFku&2, dFku&1 dk lgh Li"Vhdj.k gSA
(B) dFku&1 lR; gS] dFku&2 lR; gS ; dFku&2, dFku&1 dk lgh Li"Vhdj.k ugha gSA
(C) dFku&1 lR; gS] dFku&2 vlR; gS
(D) dFku&1 vlR; gS] dFku&2 lR; gS
Comprehension (9 to 11) [IIT-JEE 2007, Paper-1, (4, –1), 81]

Consider the circle x2 + y2 = 9 and the parabola y2 = 8x. They intersect at P and Q in the first and the
fourth quadrants, respectively. Tangents to the circle at P and Q intersect the x-axis at R and tangents to
the parabola at P and Q intersect the x-axis at S.
ekuk o`Ùk x2 + y2 = 9 ,oa ijoy; y2 = 8x izFke prqFkk±'k ,oa prqFkZ prqFkk±'k esa Øe'k% fcUnq P ,oa Q ij izfrPNsn djrs
gSaA o`Ùk ij fLFkr P ,oa Q ij Li'kZ js[kk,¡ x-v{k dks fcUnq R ij rFkk ijoy; ij fLFkr P ,oa Q ij Li'kZ js[kk,¡ x-v{k
dks fcUnq S ij izfrPNsn djrh gSA
9. The ratio of the areas of the triangles PQS and PQR is

f=kHkqt PQS ,oa PQR ds {ks=kQyksa dk vuqikr gS&
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 1 : 2 (C*) 1 : 4 (D) 1 : 8
10. The radius of the circumcircle of the triangle PRS is

f=kHkqt PRS ds ckg~;o`Ùk dh f=kT;k gS &
(A) 5 (B*) 3 3 (C) 3 2 (D) 2 3
11. The radius of the incircle of the triangle PQR is

f=kHkqt PQR ds vUr%o`Ùk dh f=kT;k gS &
8
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) (D*) 2
3
Conic Section
12. A hyperbola, having the transverse axis of length 2 sin , is confocal with the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12. Then its
equation is
fdlh vfrijoy; ds vuqizLFk v{k dh yEckbZ 2 sin  gS rFkk vfrijoy; ,oa nh?kZo`Ùk 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 ds ukfHk leku gS]
rks vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k gS & [IIT-JEE-2007, Paper-1(3, –1)/81]
2 2 2 2
(A*) x cosec  – y sec  = 1 (B) x sec  – y cosec2 = 1
2 2 2
2 2 2 2
(C) x sin  – y cos  = 1 (D) x2 cos2  – y2 sin2 = 1
13. Consider the two curves C1 : y2 = 4x, C2 : x2 + y2 – 6x + 1 = 0. Then, [IIT-JEE 2008, Paper-1, (3, –1), 82]
(A) C1 and C2 touch each other only at one point
(B*) C1 and C2 touch each other exactly at two points
(C) C1 and C2 intersect (but do not touch) at exactly two points
(D) C1 and C2 neither intersect nor touch each other
ekuk nks oØ C1 : y2 = 4x, C2 : x2 + y2 – 6x + 1 = 0 rc&
(A) C1 rFkk C2 dsoy ,d fcUnq ij ijLij Li'kZ djrs gSA
(B*) C1 rFkk C2 Bhd nks fcUnqvksa ij ijLij Li'kZ djrs gSaA
(C) C1 rFkk C2 Bhd nks fcUnqvksa ij izfrPNsn ¼fdUrq Li'kZ ugha½ djrs gSaA
(D) C1 rFkk C2 u gh izfrPNsn djrs gSa vkSj u gh ijLij Li'kZ djrs gSaA
14*. Let P(x1, y1) and Q(x2 , y2), y1 < 0, y2 < 0, be the end points of the latus rectum of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. The
equations of parabolas with latus rectum PQ are [IIT-JEE-2008, Main (4, 0)/82]
(A) x2 + 2 3 y = 3 + 3 (B*) x2 – 2 3 y = 3 + 3
(C*) x2 + 2 3 y = 3 – 3 (D) x2 – 2 3 y = 3 – 3
ekuk nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 4y2 = 4 ds ukfHkyac ds vURk fcUnq P(x1, y1) o Q(x2 , y2) ; y1 < 0, y2 < 0, gSaA PQ dks ukfHkyac ekudj
cuk;s x;s ijoy;ksa ds lehdj.k fuEu gSa [IIT-JEE-2008, Main (4, 0)/82]
(A) x2 + 2 3 y = 3 + 3 (B*) x2 – 2 3 y = 3 + 3
(C*) x2 + 2 3 y = 3 – 3 (D) x2 – 2 3 y = 3 – 3
15. Consider a branch of the hyperbola x2 – 2y2 – 2 2 x – 4 2 y – 6 = 0 [IIT-JEE-2008, Paper-2(3, –1)/81]

with vertex at the point A. Let B be one of the end points of its latus rectum. If C is the focus of the hyperbola
nearest to the point A, then the area of the triangle ABC is
vfrijoy; (hyperbola) x2 – 2y2 – 2 2 x – 4 2 y – 6 = 0
dh ,d 'kk[kk yhft,s ftldk 'kh"kZ fcUnq (vertex) A gSA ekuk blds ukfHkyac (latus rectum) dk ,d vUR; fcUnq (end point)
B gSA ;fn vfrijoy; dh fcUnq A ls fudVre ukfHk (focus) fcUnq C ij gS] rks f=kHkqt ABC dk {ks=kQy gS&
2 3 2 3
(A) 1 – (B*) –1 (C) 1 + (D) +1
3 2 3 2
16*. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the parabola y2 = 4ax at a point P on it meet its axis at points T and N,
respectively. The locus of the centroid of the triangle PTN is a parabola whose
[IIT-JEE 2009, Paper-2, (4, –1), 80]
 2a  2a
(A*) vertex is  , 0  (B) directrix is x = 0 (C) latus rectum is (D*) focus is (a, 0)
 3  3
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ds fcUnq P ij Li'kZ js[kk PT o vfHkyEc PN bldh v{k dk Øe'k% fcUnq T ,oa N ij feyrs gSaA f=kHkqt
PTN ds dsUnzd dk fcUnqiFk ijoy; gS ftldk ¼ftldh½
 2a  2a
(A) 'kh"kZ  , 0  (B) fu;rk x = 0 (C) ukfHkyEc (D) ukfHk (a, 0)
 3  3
Sol. (A,D)
Conic Section
17*. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2x2 – 2y2 = 1 orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse is reciprocal of
that of the hyperbola. If the axes of the ellipse are along the coordinate axes, then
[IIT-JEE 2009, Paper-2, (4, –1), 80]
(A*) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 2 (B*) The foci of ellipse are (±1, 0)
(C) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 4 (D) The foci of ellipse are (± 2 , 0)
2 2
vfrijoy; 2x – 2y = 1 dks ,d nh?kZo`Ùk yEcor~ dkVrk gSA nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk dh O;qRØe
(reciprocal) gSA ;fn nh?kZo`Ùk ds v{k funsZ'kk{kksa ds lEikrh gks] rc &
(A) nh?kZo`Ùk dk lehdj.k x2 + 2y2 = 2 gS (B) nh?kZo`Ùk dh ukfHk;k¡ (±1, 0) gS
(C) nh?kZo`Ùk dk lehdj.k x2 + 2y2 = 4 gS (D) nh?kZo`Ùk dh ukfHk;k¡ (± 2 , 0) gS
Sol. (A, B)
18*. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parabola y2 = 4x. If the axis of the parabola touches a circle of radius
r having AB as its diameter, then the slope of the line joining A and B can be
[IIT-JEE-2010, Paper-1(3, 0)/84]
ekuk fd ijoy; y2 = 4x ij A ,oa B nks fHkUu&fHkUu fcUnq gSaA ;fn ijoy; dk v{k] r f=kT;k okys ml o`Ùk dks Li'kZ djrk
gS ftldk O;kl AB gks] rks A ,oa B ls gksdj tkus okyh ljy js[kk dh izo.krk (slope) gks ldrh gS&
1 1 2 2
(A) – (B) (C*) (D*) –
r r r r
19. Let (x, y) be any point on the parabola y2 = 4x. Let P be the point that divides the line segment from (0, 0) to
(x, y) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then the locus of P is
eku yhft, (x, y) ijoy; y2 = 4x ij dksbZ fcUnq gSA ;fn (0, 0) ls (x, y) rd ds js[kh; [kaM dks fcUnq P, 1 : 3 ds vuqikr
esa foHkkftr djrk gS] rc P dk fcUnqiFk fuEu gSA [IIT-JEE 2011, Paper-2, (3, –1), 80]
(A) x2 = y (B) y2 = 2x (C*) y2 = x (D) x2 = 2y
Ans. (C)
20*. Let L be a normal to the parabola y2 = 4x. If L passes through the point (9, 6), then L is given by
eku yhft, L ijoy; y2 = 4x dk ,d vfHkyEc gSA ;fn L, fcUnq (9, 6) ls gksdj tkrk gs] rc L dk lehdj.k fuEu gS&
(A*) y – x + 3 = 0 (B*) y + 3x – 33 = 0 (C) y + x – 15 = 0 (D*) y – 2x + 12 = 0
Ans. (A, B, D) [IIT-JEE 2011, Paper-2, (4, 0), 80]
x2 y2
21*. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola – = 1 be reciprocal to that of the ellipse x 2 + 4y2 = 4. If the
a2 b2
hyperbola passes through a focus of the ellipse, then
x2 y2
(A) the equation of the hyperbola is – =1
3 2
(B*) a focus of the hyperbola is (2, 0)
5
(C) the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
3
(D*) the equation of the hyperbola is x2 – 3y2 = 3
x2 y2
ekuk vfrijoy; – = 1 dh mRdsUnzrk (eccentricity), nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 4y2 = 4 dh mRdsUnzrk dh O;qRØe.kh;
a2 b2
(reciprocal) gSA ;fn vfrijoy; nh?kZo`Ùk dh ,d ukfHk (focus) ls gkdj xqtjrk gS] rks
x2 y2
(A) vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k – = 1 gSA
3 2
(B) vfrijoy; dh ,d ukfHk (2, 0) gSA
5
(C) vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk gSA [IIT-JEE 2011, Paper-1, (4, 0), 80]
3
(D) vfrijoy; dk lehdj.k x2 – 3y2 = 3 gSA
Ans. (B, D)
Conic Section
x2 y2
22. Let P(6, 3) be a point on the hyperbola   1 . If the normal at the point P intersects the x-axis at
a2 b2
(9, 0), then the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
x2 y2
;fn vfrijoy;   1 ds fcUnq P(6, 3) ij vfHkyEc x-v{k dks (9, 0) ij dkVrk gS] rc vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk
a2 b2
(eccentricity) fuEu gksxh [IIT-JEE 2011, Paper-2, (3, –1), 80]
5 3
(A) (B*) (C) 2 (D) 3
2 2
Ans. (B)
x2 y 2
23. The ellipse E1 :   1 is inscribed in a rectangle R whose sides are parallel to the coordinate axes.
9 4
Another ellipse E2 passing through the point (0, 4) circumscribes the rectangle R. The eccentricity of the
ellipse E2 is [IIT-JEE 2012, Paper-1, (3, –1), 70]
x2 y 2
vk;r R ftldh Hkqtk;as funsZ'kkad v{kksa ds lekUrj gS ds vUnj nh?kZo`Ùk E1 :   1 dks mRdhf.kZr (inscribe) fd;k x;k
9 4
gSA ,d vU; nh?kZo`Ùk E2 tks fcUnq (0, 4) ls xqtjrk gS vkSj vk;r R dks ifjxr (circumscribe ) djrk gS] dh mRdsUnzrk
(eccentricity) fuEu gS
2 3 1 3
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 2 2 4
Sol. Ans (C)
x2 y2
24. Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola –  1 , parallel to the straight line 2x – y = 1. The points of
9 4
contacts of the tangents on the hyperbola are [IIT-JEE 2012, Paper-1, (4, 0), 70]
x2 y2
vfrijoy; –  1 , ij ljy js[kk 2x – y = 1 ds lekUrj Li'kZ js[kk;s [khaph x;h gSA bu Li'kZ js[kkvksa ds vfrijoy;
9 4
ij Li'kZ fcUnq (points of contacts) fuEu gS
 9 1   9 1 
(A*)  ,
2 2 2 
 (B*)  –
 2 2
,–
2
 
(C) 3 3 , – 2 2  
(D) – 3 3 , 2 2 
Sol. Ans (AB)
25. Let P be the point on the parabola y2 = 4x which is at the shortest distance from the center S of the circle
x2 + y2 – 4x –16y +64 = 0. Let Q be the point on the circle dividing the line segment SP internally. Then
[JEE (Advanced) 2016, Paper-2, (4, –2)/62]
(A) SP = 2 5
(B) SQ : QP =  5 1 : 2
(C) the x-intercept of the normal to the parabola at P is 6
1
(D) the slope of the tangent to the circle at Q is
2
Conic Section
Ekkuk fd ijoy; (parabola) y2 = 4x ij P ,d ,slk fcUnq gS tks o‘Ùk x2 + y2 – 4x –16y +64 = 0 ds dsUnz fcUnq S ls U;wure
nwjh ij gSA ekuk fd o‘Ùk ij fcUnq Q ,slk gS fd og js[kk[kaM SP dks vkarfjd foHkkftr djrk gSA rc
(A) SP = 2 5
(B) SQ : QP =  
5 1 : 2
(C) ijoy; ds fcaUnq P ij vfHkyEc (normal) dk x-var%[k.M 6 gSA

1
(D) o‘Ùk ds fcUnq Q ij Li’’kZjs[kk dh <ky (slope) gSA
2
Ans. (A,C,D)
Answer Q.26, Q.27 and Q.27 by appropriately matching the information given in the three columns
of the following table. Hyperbola
Columns 1, 2 and 3 contain conics, equations of tangents to the conics and points of contact,
repectively.
Column-1 Column-2 Column-3
2 2 2 2  a 2a 
(I) x +y =a (i) my = m x + a (P)  m2 , m 
 
2 2 2 2
 ma a 
(II) x +a y =a (ii) y = mx + a m2  1 (Q)  , 
2 2
 m 1 m 1
2
 a2m 1
(III) y = 4ax (iii) y = mx + a 2m2  1 (R)  2 2 , 
 a m 1 a m  1 
2 2
2 2 2 2
 a2m 1
(IV) x –a y =a (iv) y = mx + 2 2
a m 1 (S)  2 2 , 
2 2
 a m 1 a m 1 
uhps nh x;h Vsc y ds rhu d¡kyeksa esa miyC/k lwpuk dk mi;qDr <ax ls lqesy dj izJksa 26, 27 ,oa 28 ds mÙkj nhft;sA
dkWye 1, 2 rFkk 3 esa Øe'k% dkWfud (conic) ij Li'kZjs[kk (tangent) dk lehdj.k rFkk Li'kZfcUnq
(point of contact) fn;s x;s gSA
dkWye 1 dkWye 2 dkWye 3
 a 2a 
(I) x2 + y2 = a2 (i) my = m2 x + a (P)  m2 , m 
 
2 2 2 2
 ma a 
(II) x +a y =a (ii) y = mx + a m2  1 (Q)  , 
2
 m 1 m  1 
2
2
 a 2m 1
(III) y = 4ax (iii) y = mx + a2m2  1 (R)  2 2 , 
 a m 1 a m  1 
2 2
2 2 2 2
  a2m 
1
(IV) x –a y =a (iv) y = mx + a2m2  1 (S)  2 2 , 
 a m 1 a m  1 
2 2
Conic Section
26. For a = 2 , if a tangent is drawn to a suitable conic (Column 1) at the point of contact (–1, 1), then which of
the following options is the only CORRECT combination for obtaining its equation ?
[JEE(Advanced) 2017, Paper-1,(3, –1)/61]
a = 2 ds fy;s mi;qDr dkWfud (dkWye 1) ij ,d Li’'kZ js[kk [khph tkrh gS ftldk Li’'kZ fcUnq (–1, 1), rc fuEu esa ls dkSu
lk fodYi bl Li’'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k izkIr djus dk dsoy lgh la;kstu gS?
(A) (I) (ii) (Q) (B) (I) (i) (P) (C) (III) (i) (P) (D) (II) (ii) (Q)
Ans. (A)
 1
27. The tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) at  3, 2  is found to be 3 x + 2y = 4, then which of the
 
following options is the only CORRECT combination? [JEE(Advanced) 2017, Paper-1,(3, –1)/61]
  1
;fn mi;qDr dkWfud (dkWye 1) ds fcUnq  3, 2  ij Li’'kZ js[kk 3 x + 2y = 4 gS] rc fuEu esa ls dkSu lk fodYi dsoy
 
lgh la;kstu gS ?
(A) (IV) (iv) (S) (B) (II) (iv) (R) (C) (IV) (iii) (S) (D) (II) (iii) (R)
Ans. (B)
28. If a tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) is found to be y = x + 8 and its point of contact is (8, 16), then
which of the following options is the only CORRECT combination?
[JEE(Advanced) 2017, Paper-1,(3, –1)/61]
;fn mi;qDr dkWfud (dkWye 1) ds Li’'kZfcUnq (8, 16), ij Li’'kZjs[kk y = x + 8 gS] rc fuEu esa ls dkSu lk fodYi dsoy lgh
la;kstu gS ?
(A) (III ) (i) (P) (B) (I) (ii) (Q) (C) (II) (iv) (R) (D) (III) (ii) (Q)
Ans. (A)
Conic Section
PART - I : PRACTICE TEST PAPER
This Section is not meant for classroom discussion. It is being given to promote self-study and self testing
amongst the Resonance students.
Max. Marks : 120 Max. Time : 1 Hr.
Important Instructions :
1. The test is of 1 hour duration and max. marks 120.

2. The test consists 30 questions, 4 marks each.
3. Only one choice is correct 1 mark will be deducted for incorrect response. No deduction from the total score will
be made if no response is indicated for an item in the answer sheet.
4. There is only one correct response for each question. Filling up more than one response in any question will be
treated as wrong response and marks for wrong response will be deducted accordingly as per instructions 3
above.
Max. Marks : 120 Max. Time : 1 Hr.
egÙoiw.kZ funsZ'k %
1. ijh{kk dh vof/k 1 ?kaVs gS] rFkk vf/kdre vad 120 gSA
2. bl ijh{kk iqfLrdk esa 30 iz'u gSA izR;sd 4 vad dk gSA
3. dsoy ,d fodYi lgh gSA izR;sd iz'u ds xyr mÙkj ds fy;s 1 vad fy;k tk;sxkA ;fn mÙkj iqfLrdk esa fdlh iz'u dk mÙkj
ugha fn;k x;k gks rks dqy izkIrkad ls dksbZ dVkSrh ugha fd tk;sxhA
4. çR;sd iz'u dk dsoy ,d gh lgh mÙkj gSA ,d ls vf/kd mÙkj nsus ij mls xyr mÙkj ekuk tk;sxk vkSj mijksDr funsZ'k 3
ds vuqlkj vad dkV fy;s tk;saxsA
1. The equation of the conic with focus at (1,–1) , directrix along x – y + 1 = 0 and with eccentricity 2 is
‘’'kkado dk lehdj.k ftldh ukfHk (1,–1) , rFkk fu;rk x – y + 1 = 0 vkSj mRdsUnzrk 2 gS&
(1) x2 – y2 = 1 (2) xy = 1
(3*) 2xy – 4x + 4y + 1 = 0 (4) 2xy + 4x – 4y – 1 = 0
2. The length of latus rectum of a parabola whose directrix is x + y – 2 = 0 and focus is (3,–4) is
ijoy; ds ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gS ftldh fu;rk x + y – 2 = 0 vkSj ukfHk (3,–4) gS&
3 3
(1) 6 2 (2*) 3 2 (3) (4)
2 2 2
3. The equation of parabola whose vertices is (–1,–2), axis is vertical and which passes through the point
(3,6) is
ijoy; dk lehdj.k ftlds 'kh"kZ (–1,–2), gS] v{k m/okZ/kj gS rFkk tks (3,6) gS xqtjrk gS&
(1*) x2 + 2x – 2y – 3 = 0 (2) 2x2 = 3y
2
(3) x – 2x – y + 3 = 0 (4) x2 = 3y
4. Equation of tangent to the parabola x2 = 4ay is

ijoy; x2 = 4ay dh Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS&
(1) ty = x + at2 (2) ty = – x + at2 (3) tx + y = at2 (4*) tx – y = at2
Conic Section
1
5. If slope of the tangent to the parabola y2 = – 8 x is then equation of the tangent is
2
1
;fn ijoy; y2 = – 8 x dh Li'kZ js[kk dh izo.krk gS] rc Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS&
2
(1) x + 2y + 8 = 0 (2) x – 2y + 8 = 0 (3*) x – 2y – 8 = 0 (4) 2x – y – 8 = 0
6. The equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 16 x, which is perpendicular to the line y = 3x + 7 is
ijoy; y2 = 16 x, dh Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k tks fd js[kk y = 3x + 7 ds yEcor~ gS&
(1) y – 3x + 4 = 0 (2) 3y – x + 36 = 0 (3) 3y + x – 36 = 0 (4*) 3y + x + 36 = 0
7. Equation of the tangent common to the parabola y2 = 4x and x2 = – 32y is

ijoy; y2 = 4x vkSj x2 = – 32y dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dh lehdj.k gS&
(1) 2x + y – 4 =0 (2) x + 2y – 4 = 0 (3*) x – 2y + 4 =0 (4) x – 2y – 4 =0
8. Two perpendicular tangents to y2 = 4ax always intersect on the line if

ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh nks yEcor Li'kZ js[kk lnSo js[kk ij izfrPNsn djrh gS&
(1) x = a (2*) x + a = 0 (3) x + 2a = 0 (4) x + 4a = 0
a 
9. The equation of the normal at the point  ,a  to the parabola y2 = 4ax , is
4 
a 
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ds fCkUnq  4 ,a  ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k gS&
 
(1) 4x + 8y + 9a = 0 (2*) 4x + 8y – 9a = 0
(3) 4x + y – a = 0 (4) 4x – y + a = 0
10. Let P be the point on the parabola y2 = 8x which is at a minimum distance from centre C of the circle
x2 + (y + 6)2 = 1 then the equation of the circle having end point of diameter as P and C is
(1) x2 + y2 – 2x – 10y + 24 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 4x – 10y – 24 = 0
2 2
(3) x + y + 2x + 10y – 24 = 0 (4*) x2 + y2 – 2x + 10y + 24 = 0
11. The locus of the mid point of all chord parallel to the line y = 2x + 3 to the parabola y2 = 8x is
ijoy; y = 2x + 3 dh js[kk ds lekUrj lHkh thokvksa ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnq iFk y2 = 8x gS&
(1*) y = 2 (2) y = –2 (3) 2y + 1 = 0 (4) y = 8
12. If the latus rectum of an ellipse be equal to half of its minor axis, then its eccentricity is
;fn nh/kZo`Ùk dk ukfHkyEc] bldh y?kqv{k dk vk/kk gS] rc bldh mRdsnzrk gS&
1 3 2 2
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
2 2 3 3
13. The equation of the ellipse whose one of the vertex is (0,7) and the corresponding directrix is y = 12 is
nh?ko`Ùk dk lehdj.k ftldk ,d 'kh"kZ (0,7) gS rFkk laxr fu;rk y = 12 gS&
(1) 95x2 + 144y2 = 4655 (2*) 144x2 + 95y2 = 4655
2 2
(3) 144x + 95y = 4750 (4) 95x2 + 144y2 = 13685
14. Equation of the ellipse whose focii are (2,2) and (4,2) and the major axis is of the length 10 is
nh?kZo`r dk lehdj.k ftldh ukfHk;ka (2,2) vkSj (4,2) rFkk nh?kZv{k dh yEckbZ 10 gS&
(1*) 25 (x – 3)2 + 24 (y – 2)2 = 600 (2) 25 (x + 3)2 + 24 (y + 2)2 = 600
(3) 24 (x – 3)2 + 25 (y – 2)2 = 600 (4) 24 (x + 3)2 + 25 (y + 2)2 = 600
Conic Section
15. The equation of the tangent to the ellipse x2 + 16y2 = 16 making an angle of 60º with x-axis may be
nh?kZoÙk x2 + 16y2 = 16 dh Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gkssxk tks x- v{k ls 60º dk dks.k cukrh gS&
(1) y = 3x + 47 (2) y = 3x – 13 (3) y = 3x + 16 (4*) y = 3x +7
16. Equations of the tangent lines of the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144 which passes through the point (2,3) is
nh?kZo`Ùk 9x2 + 16y2 = 144 dh Li'kZ js[kkvksa dh lehdj.k gksxh tks fcUnq (2,3) ls xqtjrh gSA
(1) y = – 3 and vkSj x + y = 5 (2) x – y = – 1 and vkSj x + y = 5
(3) x – y = – 1 and vkSj y = 3 (4*) y = 3 and vkSj x + y = 5
17. The angle between pair of tangents drawn to the ellipse 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 from the point (1,2) is
fcUnq (1,2) ls nh?kZo`Ùk 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 ij [khph xbZ Li'kZ js[kkvksa ds ;qXe ds e/; dks.k gS&
 12   12 
(1) tan–1   (2*) tan–1   (3) tan–1 (6 5 ) (4) tan–1 (12 5 )
 5  5
18. Equation of the normal at the point (2,3) on the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 180 is
nh?kZo`Ùk 9x2 + 16y2 = 180 ds fcUnq (2,3) ij vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k gS&
(1) 3y = 8x – 10 (2*) 3y = 8x – 7 (3) 3x + 8y – 30 = 0 (4) 3x – 8y + 18 = 0
19. For each point (x,y) on an ellipse , the sum of the distance from (x,y) to the points (2,0) and (–2,0) is 8. Then
the positive value of x so that (,3) lies on the ellipse is -
nh?kZo`Ùk ij izR;sd fcUnq (x,y) ds fy,] (x,y) ls fcUnqvksa (2,0) vkSj (–2,0) dh nqfj;k¡ dk ;ksxQy 8 gS] rc x dk /kukRed eku
gksxk tcfd (,3) nh?kZo`Ùk ij fLFkr gSA
1
(1*) 2 (2) 2 3 (3) (4) 4
3
20. An ellipse is described by using an endless string which is passed over two points. If the axes are 6 cm and
4 cm, the necessary length of the string and the distance between the pins respectively in cm, are
,d nh?kZo`Ùk dks vUrghu fljksokyh Mksjh ls cuk;k tkrk gS] tks nks fcUnqvksa ls xqtjrh gSA ;fn v{k] 6 lseh- vkSj 4 lseh-
Øe'k% vko';d Mksjh dh yEckbZ] rFkk fiuksa ds e/; nqjh lseh esa gS]
(1) 6, –2 5 (2*) 6 + 2 5 ,2 5 (3) 6,2 + 5 (4) 6, 5
21. The line passing through the extremity A of the major axis and extremity B of the minor axis of the ellipse
x2 + 9y2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the point M, then the area of the triangle with vertices at A,M and the
origin O is
,d ljy js[kk] tks nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 9y2 = 9 dh nh?kZv{k ds pje fcUnq A ls xqtjrh gS rFkk nh?kZv{k dk y?kqv{k fljs B ls xqtjrk
gS
blds lgk;d o`Ùk dks fcUnq M ij feyrh gS] rc A,M vkSj ewy fcUnq ij 'kh"kksZ ls cus f=kHkqt dk {ks=kQy gS&
31 29 21 27
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
10 10 10 10
22. If P is a point on the hyperbola 16x2 –9y2 = 144 whose focii are S1 and S2 then |PS1 – PS2| is equal to
;fn vfrijoy; 16x2 –9y2 = 144 ij fcUnq P gS] rFkk ukfHk;ka S1 o S2 gS rc |PS1 – PS2| cjkcj gS&
(1) 4 (2*) 6 (3) 8 (4) 12
23. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines bxt – ayt = ab and bx + ay = abt is
(1) A parabola (2) An ellipse (3*) A hyperbola (4) A straight line
js[kkvksa bxt – ayt = ab vkSj bx + ay = abt ds izfrPNsn fcUnq dk fcUnq iFk gS&
(1) ,d ijoy; (2) ,d nh?kZo`Ùk (3*) vr vfrijoy; (4) ,d ljy js[kk
Conic Section
24. The equation of the hyperbola in the standard form (with transverse axis along the x-axis) having the length
5
of latus rectum = 9 units and eccentricity = is -
4
5
vfrijoy; dk ekud lehdj.k ¼ftldk vuqizLFk v{k] x-v{k ds vuqfn'k gS]) ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ = 9 rFkk mRdsUnzrk =
4
gS -
x2 y 2 x 2 y2 x2 y2 x2 y2
(1*) – 1 (2) – 1 (3) –  1 (4) –  1
64 36 36 64 36 64 64 36
25. The locus of the centre of a circle, which touches externally the given two circle’s is
o`Ùk ds dsUæ dk fcUnqiFk tks nks fn, x, o`Ùk dks ckg~; Li'kZ djrk gS&
(1) circle (2) parabola (3) ellipse (4*) hyperbola
(1) o`Ùk (2) ijoy; (3) nh?kZo`Ùk (4*) vfrijoy;
26. Let 16x2 – 3y2 – 32x – 12y – 44 = 0 be a hyperbola, then which of the following does not hold
ekuk 16x2 – 3y2 – 32x – 12y – 44 = 0 vfrijoy; gS] rc fuEu esa ls dkSulk larq"B ugh gksrk&
32
(1) Length of the transverse axis is 2 3 (2) Length of latus rectum is
3
19 3
(3) Eccentricity is (4*) Equation of a directrix is x =
3 19
32
(1) vuqizLFk v{k dh yEckbZ 2 3 gSA (2) ukfHkyEc dh yEckbZ gSA
3
19 3
(3) mRdsUnzrk gSA (4*) fu;rk dk lehdj.k x = gSA
3 19
x2 y2
27. If PQ is a double ordinate of the hyperbola –  1 such that OPQ is equilateral, O being the centre,
a2 b2
then the eccentricity e satisfies
x2 y2
;fn PQ, vfrijoy; –  1 dh f}dksfV gS tcfd OPQ leckgq gSA, O dsUnz gS rc mRdsUnzrk e larq"B gksrh gS&
a2 b2
 2  11 3 2
(1) e   1,  (2) e = (3) e = (4*) e >
 3 10 2 3
28. Equation of common tangent to the parabola y2 = 8x and hyperbola 3x2 – y2 = 3 is/are
ijoy; y2 = 8x vkSj vfrijoy; 3x2 – y2 = 3 dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS&
(1*) 2x ± y + 1 = 0 (2) 2x ± y – 1 = 0
(3) x ± 2y + 1 = 0 (4) x ± 2y – 1 = 0
x2 y2
29. If the two tangents drawn on hyperbola –  1 in such a way that the product of their gradients is c2,
a2 b2
then they intersects on the curve
x2 y2
;fn vfrijoy; –  1 ij nks Li'kZ js[kk,a bl izdkj [khaph tkrh gS fd mudh izo.krkvksa dk xq.kuQy c2, gS] rc os
a2 b2
fdl oØ ij dks izfrPNsn djrs gS&
(1*) y2 + b2 = c2 (x2 – a2) (2) y2 + b2 = c2 (x2 + a2)
(3) ax2 + by2 = c2 (4) x2 + y2 = c2 (y2 + b2)
Conic Section
x2 y2
30. Let C be the centre of the hyperbola –  1 . The tangents at any point P on this hyperbola meets the
a2 b2
straight line bx – ay = 0 and bx + ay = 0 in the point Q and P respectively,then CQ . CR =
x2 y2
ekuk C vfrijoy; –  1 . dk dsUnz gS bl ijoy; ij fdlh fcUnq P ij Li'kZ js[kk] ljy js[kk bx – ay = 0 vkSj
a2 b2
bx + ay = 0 dks Øe'k% Q rFkk P ij feyrh gS] rc CQ . CR = gS&
1 1 1 1
(1*) a2 + b2 (2) a2 – b2 (3) 2
 2 (4) 2
– 2
a b a b
Practice Test (JEE-Main Pattern)

OBJECTIVE RESPONSE SHEET (ORS)
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans.
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans.
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans.
Conic Section
PART - II : PRACTICE QUESTIONS
1. At any point P on the parabola y2 – 2y – 4x + 5 = 0 a tangent is drawn which meets the directrix at Q. The
1
locus of point R, which divides QP externally in the ratio : 1 is
2
ijoy; y2 – 2y – 4x + 5 = 0 ds fdlh fcUnq P ij [khaph xbZ Li'kZ js[kk fu;rk dks fcUnq Q ij dkVrk gks] rks fcUnq R dk
1
fcUnqiFk Kkr dhft, tks QP dks vuqikr : 1 esa cká foHkkftr djrk gSA
2
(1*) (x + 1) (y – 1)2 + 4 = 0 (2) (x + 1) (y – 1)2 + 2 = 0
(3) (x + 1) (y – 1)2 – 4 = 0 (4) (x + 1) (y + 1)2 – 4 = 0
2. Let S be the focus of the parabola y2 = 8x and let PQ be the common chord of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y =
0 and the given parabola. The area of the triangle PQS is
ijoy; y2 = 8x dh ukfHk S gS vkSj PQ bl ijoy; vkSj o`Ùk x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 dh mHk;fu"B thok gSA f=kHkqt PQS
dk {ks=kQy gSµ
(1) 2 (2*) 4 (3) 6 (4) 8
3. The equation of the common tangent touching the circle (x – 3)2 + y2 = 9 and the parabola y2 = 4x above the
x-axis is
o`Ùk (x – 3)2 + y2 = 9 vkSj ijoy; y2 = 4x dh x-v{k ls Åij mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gksxk&
(1) 3 y = 3x + 1 (2) 3 y = – (x + 3) (3*) 3 y =x + 3 (4) 3 y = –(3x + 1)
4. The equation of the directrix of the parabola y 2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 is:
ijoy; y2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 dh fu;rk dk lehdj.k gS&
(1) x =  1 (2) x = 1 (3) x =  3/2 (4*) x = 3/2
5. The locus of the mid point of the line segment joining the focus to a moving point on the parabola y2 = 4ax is
another parabola with directrix
ijoy; y2 = 4ax ij fLFkr fdlh pj fcUnq dks ukfHk ls feykus okys js[kk[k.M ds e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk ,d nwljk ijoy;
gksxk ftldh fu;rk gS&
a a
(1) x = – a (2) x =  (3*) x = 0 (4) x 
2 2
6. The equation of the common tangent to the curves y2 = 8x and xy = – 1 is
oØ y2 = 8x rFkk xy = – 1 dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k gS&
(1) 3y = 9x + 2 (2) y = 2x + 1 (3) 2y = x + 8 (4*) y = x + 2
7. Normals are drawn from the point P with slopes m1, m 2, m 3 to the parabola y 2 = 4x. If locus of P with
m 1 m 2 =  is a part of the parabola itself then =
ijoy; y2 = 4x ij fdlh fcUnq P ls rhu vfHkyEc [khpsa tkrs gS ftudh izo .krk,¡ Øe'k% m1, m 2, m 3 gSA
;fn m 1 m 2 =  ysrs gq, fcUnq P dk fcUnqiFk fn;k x;k ijoy; gh gksrk gks] rks dk eku gS&
(1) 0 (2) 1 (3*) 2 (4) 3
Conic Section
8. Find the point on x 2 + 2 y2 = 6, which is nearest to the line x + y = 7.

x2 + 2 y2 = 6 ij og fcUnq Kkr dhft, tks js [ kk x + y = 7 ds fudVre gks A
(1*) (2, 1) (2) (–2, 1) (3) (–2, –1) (4) (2, –1)
x2  
9. Tangent is drawn to ellipse
27
 
+ y2 = 1 at 3 3 cos  , sin  where    0 ,  . Then the value of 
 2
such that sum of intercepts on axes made by this tangent is minimum is :
x2  
nh?kZo `Ùk
27
 
+ y2 = 1 ds fcUnq 3 3 cos  , sin  tgk¡    0 ,  ij Li'kZ js[ kk [kha ph tkrh gS A rc bl Li'kZ
 2
js[ kk }kjk v{kksa ij dkVs x;s vUr%[k.Mksa dk ;ksxQy U;wure gksus ds fy,  dk eku gS&
   
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
3 6 8 4
10. The normal at a point P on the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 16 meets the x-axis at Q. If M is the mid point of the line
segment PQ, then the locus of M intersects the latus rectum of the given ellipse at the points
 3 5 2  3 5 19   1  4 3 
(1)   ,  (2)   , (3*)   2 3 ,   (4)   2 3 , 

 2 7   2 4   7  7 
nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 4y2 = 16 ds fdlh fcUnq P ij vfHkyEc x-v{k dks fcUnq Q ij feyrk gSA ;fn js[kk&[k.M PQ dk e/; fcUnq
M gS] rc M dk fcUnqiFk fn, x, nh?kZo`Ùk ds ukfHkyEcksa dks fcUnqvksa ij dkVrk gS &
 3 5 2  3 5 19   1  4 3 
(1)   ,  (2)   , (3*)   2 3 ,   (4)   2 3 , 
 2 7   2 4   7  7 
A
11*. In a triangle ABC with fixed base BC, the vertex A moves such that cos B + cos C = 4 sin2 . If a, b and c
2
denote the lengths of the sides of the triangle opposite to the angles A, B and C respectively, then
(1) b + c = 4a (2*) b + c = 2a
(3*) locus of points A is an ellipse (4) locus of point A is a pair of straight lines
A
fu;r vk/kkj BC okys f=kHkqt ABC dk 'kh"kZ fcUnq A bl izdkj xfreku gS fd cos B + cos C = 4 sin2 . ;fn
2
a, b ,oa c Øe'k% f=kHkqt ds dks.kksa A, B ,oa C dh lEeq[k Hkqtkvksa dh yEckb;ksa dks iznf'kZr djrs gSa] rc
(1) b + c = 4a
(2*) b + c = 2a
(3*) fcUnq A dk fcUnq iFk ,d nh?kZo`Ùk gSA
(4) fcUnq A dk fcUnq iFk ,d ljy js[kk ;qXe gSA
x2 y2
12. The line 2x + y = 1 is tangent to the hyperbola –
= 1 . If this line passes through the point of
a2 b2
intersection of the nearest directrix and the x-axis, then the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
x2 y2
ljy js[kk 2x + y = 1, vfrijoy; – = 1 dh Li'kZ js[kk gSA ;fn ;g js[kk fudVre fu;rk (directrix) rFkk
a2 b2
x-v{k ds dVku fcUnq ls gksdj xqtjrh gS] rks vfrijoy; dh mRdsUnzrk gSµ
(1) 3/2 (2*) 2 (3) 5/2 (4) 3
Conic Section
x2 y2
13. Tangents are drawn from any point on the hyperbola – = 1 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9. The locus of mid-
9 4
point of the chord of contact is
x2 y2
vfrijoy; – = 1 ij fLFkr fdlh fcUnq ls o`Ùk x2 + y2 = 9 ij Li'kZ js[ kk,sa [khaph tkrh gSaA Li'kZ thok ds
9 4
e/; fcUnq dk fcUnqiFk gSµ

(1) x2 + y2 = 5 (2) x2 – y2 = 5
2 2
x2 y2  x2 – y2  x2 y2  x2  y2 
(3)  =  
 (4*)  =  

9 4  9  9 4  9 
14. The line passing through the extremity A of the major axis and extremity B of the minor axis of the ellipse
x2 + 9y2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the point M. Then the area of the triangle with vertices at A, M and
the origin O is [IIT-JEE 2009, Paper-1, (3, –1)/ 80]
nh?kZo`Ùk x2 + 9y2 = 9 ds nh?kZ&v{k ds fljs A rFkk y?kq&v{k ds fljs B ls tkus okyh js[kk blds lgk;d&o`Ùk dks fcUnq M
ij dkVrh gSA fcUnqvksa A, M o ewy fcUnq O dks 'kh"kZ ysdj cuk;s x;s f=kHkqt dk {ks=kQy gS&
31 29 21 27
(1) (2) (3) (4*)
10 10 10 10
15. The common tangents to the circle x 2 + y2 = 2 and the parabola y2 = 8x touch the circle at the points P,
Q and the parabola at the points R, S. Then the area of the quadrilateral PQRS is
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C) 9 (D) 15
o`Ùk x 2 + y2 = 2 rFkk ijoy; (parabola) y2 = 8x dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZj s[ kk;sa (common tangents) o`Ùk dks P, Q ij
rFkk ijoy; dks R, S ij Li'kZ djrh gS] rc prqHkqZt (quadrilateral) PQRS dk {ks=kQy gS&
(1) 3 (2) 6 (3) 9 (4*) 15
Ans. (4)
COMPREHENSION
vuq PNsn (COMPREHENSION)
Comprehension # 1 (Q. 16 to 18)
Normals are drawn at point P, Q and R lying on the parabola y2 = 4x which intersect at (3, 0). Then
ijoy; y2 = 4x ij fLFkr fcUnqvksa P, Q, R ij [khaps x;s vfHkyEc fcUnq (3, 0) ij izfrPNsn djrs gks] rks&
16. Area of PQR is
PQR dk {ks=kQy gSµ
(1*) 2 (2) 3 (3) 5 (4) 5/2
17. Centroid of PQR is
PQR dk dsUnzd gSµ
(1) (2, 0) (2*) (2/3, 0) (3) (5/2, 0) (4) (0, 5/2)
18. Circumcentre of PQR is
PQR dk ifjdsUnz gSµ
(1) (2, 0) (2) (2/3, 0) (3*) (5/2, 0) (4) (0, 5/2)
Conic Section
Comprehension # 2 (Q.19 to 21)
Let ABCD be a square of side length 2 units. C2 is the circle through vertices A, B, C, D and C1 is the circle
touching all the sides of the square ABCD. L is a line through A.
ekuk ABCD, 2 bdkbZ yEckbZ dh Hkqtk okyk ,d oxZ gSA C2 'kh"kks± A, B, C ,oa D ls xqtjus okyk ,d o`Ùk gS rFkk C1 ,d
,slk o`Ùk gS tks oxZ ABCD dh izR;sd Hkqtk dks Li'kZ djrk gSA L , 'kh"kZ A ls xqtjus okyh ,d js[kk gSA
PA 2  PB 2  PC 2  PD 2
19. If P is a point on C1 and Q in another point on C2, is equal to
QA 2  QB 2  QC2  QD 2
PA 2  PB 2  PC 2  PD 2
;fn fcUnq P, o`Ùk C1 ij ,oa fcUnq Q, o`Ùk C2 ij fLFkr gks] rks dk eku gS &
QA 2  QB 2  QC 2  QD 2
(1*) 0.75 (2) 1.25 (3) 1 (4) 0.5
20. A circle touch the line L and the circle C1 externally such that both the circles are on the same side of the
line, then the locus of centre of the circle is
(1) ellipse (2) hyperbola (3*) parabola (4) parts of straight line
,d o`Ùk js[kk L ,oa o`Ùk C1 dks ckg~; Li'kZ bl izdkj djrk gS fd nksuksa o`Ùk ljy js[kk ds ,d gh vksj gSa] rks ,sls o`Ùk ds
dsUnz dk fcUnqiFk gS &
(1) nh?kZo`Ùk (2) vfrijoy; (3) ijoy; (4) ljy js[kk dk Hkkx
21. A line M through A is drawn parallel to BD. Point S moves such that its distances from the line BD and the
vertex A are equal. If locus of S cuts M at T2 and T3 and AC at T1, then area of T1T2T3 is
1 2
(1) sq. units (2) sq. units (3*) 1 sq. units (4) 2 sq. units
2 3
,d js[kk M 'kh"kZ A ls xqtjrs gq, bl izdkj [khaph tkrh gS fd ;g BD ds lekUrj gSA ,d fcUnq S bl izdkj xfr djrk
gS fd bldh js[kk BD ls vkSj 'kh"kZ A ls nwfj;k¡ cjkcj gSA ;fn fcUnq S dk fcUnq iFk M dks T2 vkSj T3 ij rFkk AC dks
T1 ij dkVrk gS rks T1T2T3 dk {ks=kQy gksxk&
1 2
(1) oxZ bdkbZ (2) oxZ bdkbZ (3) 1 oxZ bdkbZ (4) 2 oxZ bdkbZ
2 3
Comprehension # 3 (22-24)
x2 y2
Tangents are drawn from the point P(3, 4) to the ellipse  = 1 touching the ellipse at point A and B.
9 4
22. The coordinates of A and B are [IIT-JEE 2010, Paper-2, (3, –1), 79]
 8 2 161   9 8
 
(1) (3, 0) and (0, 2) (2)  – 5 , 15  and  – , 
   5 5
 8 2 161   9 8
 
(3)  – 5 , 15  and (0, 2) (4*) (3, 0) and  – , 
   5 5
23. The orthocentre of the triangle PAB is [IIT-JEE 2010, Paper-2, (3, –1), 79]
 8  7 25   11 8   8 7
(1)  5 ,  (2)  ,  (3*)  ,  (4)  , 
 7 5 8   5 5  25 5 
Conic Section
24. The equation of the locus of the point whose distances from the point P and the line AB are equal, is
(1*) 9x2 + y2 – 6xy – 54x – 62y + 241 = 0 (2) x2 + 9y2 + 6xy – 54x + 62y – 241 = 0
(3) 9x2 + 9y2 – 6xy – 54x – 62y – 241 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 2xy + 27x + 31y – 120 = 0
[IIT-JEE 2010, Paper-2, (3, –1), 79]
vuqPNsn # 22 to 24
x2 y2
fcUnq P(3, 4) ls nh?kZo`Ùk  = 1 ij Lif'kZ;k¡ Mkyh tkrh gS tks nh?kZo`Ùk dks fcUnqvksa A ,oa B ij Li'kZ djrh gSA
9 4
22. A rFkk B ds funsZ'kkad fuEu gS& [IIT-JEE 2010, Paper-2, (3, –1), 79]
 8 2 161   9 8
 
(1) (3, 0) vkSj (0, 2) (2)  – 5 , 15  vkSj  – , 
   5 5
 8 2 161   9 8
 
(3)  – 5 , 15  vkSj (0, 2) (4*) (3, 0) vkSj  – , 
   5 5
23. f=kHkqt PAB dk yEcdsUnz fuEu gS& [IIT-JEE 2010, Paper-2, (3, –1), 79]
 8  7 25   11 8   8 7
(1)  5 ,  (2)  ,  (3*)  ,  (4)  , 
 7 5 8   5 5  25 5 
24. ml fcUnq ds fcUnqiFk dk lehdj.k ftldh fcUnq P ,oa ljy js[kk AB ls nwfj;k¡ cjkcj gS] fuEu gS&
(1*) 9x2 + y2 – 6xy – 54x – 62y + 241 = 0 (2) x2 + 9y2 + 6xy – 54x + 62y – 241 = 0
(3) 9x2 + 9y2 – 6xy – 54x – 62y – 241 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 2xy + 27x + 31y – 120 = 0
[IIT-JEE 2010, Paper-2, (3, –1), 79]
Comprehension (25-26)
x2 y2
The circle x2 + y2 – 8x = 0 and hyperbola – = 1 intersect at the points A and B.
9 4
25. Equation of a common tangent with positive slope to the circle as well as to the hyperbola is
(1) 2x – 5 y – 20 = 0 (2*) 2x – 5y+4=0
(3) 3x – 4y + 8 = 0 (4) 4x – 3y + 4 = 0 [IIT-JEE-2010, Paper-1(3, –1)/84]
26. Equation of the circle with AB as its diameter is [IIT-JEE-2010, Paper-1(3, –1)/84]
(1*) x2 + y2 – 12x + 24 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 12x + 24 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 + 24x – 12 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 24x – 12 = 0
Conic Section
vuq P Ns n
iz'u 25 -26 ds fy, vuqPNsn
x2 y2
o`Ùk x2 + y2 – 8x = 0 rFkk vfrijoy; – = 1, fcUnqvksa A rFkk B ij izfrPNsn djrs gSA
9 4
25. /kukRed izo.krk (slope) okyh] o`Ùk ,oa vfrijoy; dh mHk;fu"B Li'kZ js[kk dk lehdj.k fuEu gS&
(1) 2x – 5 y – 20 = 0 (2*) 2x – 5y+4=0
(3) 3x – 4y + 8 = 0 (4) 4x – 3y + 4 = 0 [IIT-JEE-2010, Paper-1(3, –1)/84]
26. AB O;kl okys o`Ùk dk lehdj.k fuEu gS& [IIT-JEE-2010, Paper-1(3, –1)/84]
(1*) x2 + y2 – 12x + 24 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 12x + 24 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 + 24x – 12 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 24x – 12 = 0
Paragraph for Question Nos. 27 to 28

iz'u 27 ls 28 ds fy, vuqPNsn
Let PQ be a focal chord of the parabola y 2 = 4ax. The tangents to the parabola at P and Q meet at a
point lying on the line y = 2x + a, a > 0. [IIT-JEE - 2013, Paper-2, (3,–1), 60]
ekuk fd PQ ijoy; y2 = 4ax dh ,d ukHkh; thok gSA fcUnqvksa P rFkk Q ij ijoy; dh Li'kZ js[kk,¡ ,d fcUnq ij feyrh
gSa tks fd js[kk y = 2x + a, a > 0 ij fLFkr gSA
27. Length of chord PQ is

thok PQ dh yEckbZ gS%
(1) 7a (2*) 5a (3) 2a (4) 3a
Sol. (2)
28. If chord PQ subtends an angle  at the vertex of y2 = 4ax, then tan =
;fn thok PQ, y2 = 4ax ds 'kh"kZ ij dks.k varfjr djrh gS rc tan =
2 –2 2 –2
(1) 7 (2) 7 (3) 5 (4*) 5
3 3 3 3
Sol. (4)
Paragraph For Questions 29 and 30 (iz ' u la [ ;k 29 vkS j 30 ds fy, vuq P Ns n )
Let a, r, s, t be nonzero real numbers. Let P(at 2, 2at), Q, R (ar2, 2ar) and (as2, 2as) be distinct points on
the parabola y2 = 4ax. Suppose that PQ is the focal chord and lines QR and PK are parallel, where K is
the point (2a, 0)
ekuk fd a, r, s, t 'kwU;srj okLrfod la[ ;k;sa (nonzero real numbers) gS P(at2, 2at), Q, R (ar2, 2ar) rFkk
(as2, 2as) ijoy; y2 = 4ax ij fLFkr fofHké fcUnq gS A ekuk fd PQ ukHkh; thok (focal chord ) gS ,oa js [ kk;s a QR
rFkk PK lekukUrj gS] tgk¡ K fcUnq (2a, 0) gSA
[Tangent - Normal & its application in conics] [JEE (Advanced) 2014, Paper-2, (3, –1)/60]
29. The value of r is
r dk eku gS &
1 t2  1 1 t2 – 1
(1) – (2) (3) (4*)
t t t t
Ans. (4)
Conic Section
30. If st = 1, then the tangent at P and the normal at S to the parabola meet at a point whose ordinate is
;fn st = 1 gS] rks bl ijoy; ds fcUnq P ij Li'kZj s[ kk rFkk fcUnq S ij vfHkyEc (normal) ftl fcUnq ij feyrs gS]
mldh dksfV (ordinate) gS&
(t 2  1)2 a(t 2  1)2 a( t 2  1)2 a(t 2  2)2
(1) (2*) (3) (4)
2t 3 2t 3 t3 t3
Ans. (2)
Comprehension # 1
y = x is tangent to the parabola y = ax2 + c.
ijoy; y = ax2 + c dh Li'kZ js[kk y = x gSA
31. If a = 2, then the value of c is

;fn a = 2 gks] rks c dk eku gS &
1 1 1
(1*) (2) – (3) (4) 1
8 2 2
32. If (1, 1) is point of contact then a is

;fn (1, 1) ,d Li'kZ fcUnq gks] rks a =
1 1 1 1
(1*) (2) (3) (4)
2 3 4 6
33. If c = 2, then point of contact is

;fn c = 2 gks] rks Li'kZ fcUnq gS &
(1) (2, 2) (2*) (4, 4) (3) (6, 6) (4) (3, 3)
Comprehension # 2
(3 x  4 y  10)2 (4 x  3y  15)2
+ = 1 is an ellipse
2 3
34. Major and minor axes of the ellipse are
2 3 2 2
(1) 6 and 4 (2) 150 and 100 (3) 10 3 and 10 2 (4*) and
5 5
35. Eccentricity of the ellipse is

1 3 2
(1*) (2) (3) (4) none of these
3 5 5
36. Centre of the ellipse is
 6 17   2 3
 
(1) (0, 0) (2*)  ,  (3)  5 , 5  (4) none of these
5 5   
Conic Section
vuqPNsn # 2
2 2
lehdj.k (3 x  4 y  10) + (4 x  3y  15) = 1 ,d nh?kZo`Ùk gSA
2 3
34. nh?kZo`Ùk ds nh?kZ- v{k rFkk y?kq- v{k dh yEckb;k¡ Øe'k% gS &
2 3 2 2
(1) 6 rFkk 4 (2) 150 rFkk 100 (3) 10 3 rFkk 10 2 (4*) rFkk
5 5
35. nh?kZo`Ùk dh mRdsUnzrk gS&

1 3 2
(1*) (2) (3) (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
3 5 5
36. nh?kZo`Ùk dk dsUnz gS&
 6 17   2 3
 
(1) (0, 0) (2*)  ,  (3)  5 , 5  (4) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
5 5   
Comprehension # 3 (Q.37 to Q.38)
a h g
The general second degree equation represent a hyperbola if h – ab > 0 and   0 where  = h b f .
2
g f c
Let H and H be two hyperbolas. They are said to be conjugate to one another if the transverse and
conjugate axes of one are respectively the conjugate and transverse axes of the other.
Now answer the following questions.
x2 y2
37. Let P be any point on the hyperbola – = 1 and PN be the perpendicular on transverse axis. Let
a2 b2
PN2
A and A be the vertices of hyperbola, then =
NA . NA 
a2 b2
(1) (2*) (3) a2 (4) b2
b2 a2
38. The director circle of the hyperbola x 2 – y2 = a2 is

a2
(1) x 2 + y2 = ax 2 (2) x 2 + y2 = (3) x 2 + y2 = a2 (4*) none of these
2
Conic Section
vuqPNsn # 3 (Q. 37 to Q.38)
a h g
O;kid f}?kkr lehdj.k ,d vfrijoy; dks fu:fir djrh gS] ;fn h – ab > 0 rFkk   0 tgk¡  = h b f . ekuk
2
g f c
H rFkk H nks vfrijoy; gSA ;s ,d&nwljs ds la;qXeh dgykrs gS] ;fn ,d vfrijoy; dh vuqizLFk rFkk la;qXeh v{k Øe'k%
nwljs vfrijoy; dh Øe'k% la;qXeh rFkk vuqizLFk v{k gksA
rks fuEufyf[kr iz'uksa ds mÙkj nhft, &
x2 y2
37. ekukfd vfrijoy; 2 – = 1 ij dksbZ fcUnq P fLFkr gS rFkk PN vuqizLFk v{k ij yEc gSA ekuk A rFkk A' vfrijoy;
a b2
PN2
ds 'kh"kZ gS] rks dk eku gS&
NA . NA 
a2 b2
(1) (2*) (3) a2 (4) b2
b2 a2
38. vfrijoy; x 2 – y2 = a2 dk fu;ked o`Ùk gS &

a2
(1) x 2 + y2 = ax 2 (2) x 2 + y2 = (3) x 2 + y2 = a2 (4*) buesa ls dksbZ ugha
2

Sheet Conic Section B

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Sheet Conic Section B

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Conic Section

Distinguishing various conics :

A parabola is the locus of a point, whose distance M P

(5) (2x – y – 3) 2 = – 20 (x + 2y – 4), Axis 2x – y – 3 = 0. LL = 4 5 .

Position of a point relative to a parabola :

S1 : y12 – 4ax1 Inside

Line & a parabola :

Example # 5 : Discuss the position of line y = x + 1 with respect to parabola y 2 = 4x.

 This line passes through a fixed point (– 2, 0).

Tangents to the parabola y² = 4ax :

(i) y y1 = 2 a (x + x 1) at the point (x 1, y1) ;

Solution : Equation of tangent of slope ‘m’ to the parabola y 2 = 4a(x + a) is

 algebraic sum of the slopes of the three concurrent normals is zero.

normal to the curve and that its length is 6 3a .

Self Practice Problems :

Ans. (i) y2 – 2ax = x2 , (ii) x2 = 2 {(x – a)2 + y2}

Self Practice Problems :

Equation of the chord of the parabola y² = 4ax whose middle point is

Self Practice Problems :

Self Practice Problems :

Equation of tangent whose slope is 'm' is y = mx ± 4m 2  3

(iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is y = mx 

x2 y2 x12 y12 xx1 yy1

Self Practice Problems :

Chord with a given middle point :

[where S and S are the focii of the ellipse]

• Vertices : A (a, 0) & A ( a, 0)

 2a2 (e2 – 1) = a2  2e2 – 2 = 1

Solution : Since 9 (5) 2 – (–4)2 – 1 = 225 – 16 – 1 = 208 > 0,

Line and a hyperbola :

Self Practice problems :

x12 y12 xx1 yy1

Latus Rectum (l ) :  = 2 2 c = T.A. = C.A.

 Difference of focal distances is a constant, i.e. |PS – PS| = 2a

( P lies in first quadrant) Hence co-ordinate of point P is (8,3 3 ).

 Equation of reflected ray passes through P (8,3 3 ) and S(–5,0)

fofHkUu leryks a }kjk yEco` Ù kh; 'ka d q dk ifjPNs n u

nh?kZo`Ùk ijoy; vfrijoy;

'kkda o ds fofHkUu :i (Distinguishing various conics) :

v{k - ijoy; ds v{k dk lehdj.k Y = 0 gS a A

ukfHk - ukfHk ds funs Z ' kka d (X = –a, Y = 0) gS a s A

ukfHkyEc - fn, x, ijoy; ds ukfHkyEc 4a = 3 gS a A

(5) (2x – y – 3) 2 = – 20 (x + 2y – 4), Axis 2x – y – 3 = 0. LL = 4 5 .

izkpfyd fu:i.k (Parametric Representation) :

ijoy; ds lkis { k fdlh fcUnq dh fLFkfr

mnkgj.k # 4 : tk¡ p dhft, fd fcUnq (3, 4) ijoy; y 2 = 4x ds vUnj gS ;k ckgjA

ijyo; ,oa ljy js [ kk (Line & a Parabola) :

uks V : 1. t 1 ,oa t 2 dks feykus okyh thok dk lehdj.k 2x  (t 1 + t 2) y + 2 at 1 t 2 = 0 gS A

mnkgj.k # 5 : ijoy; y 2 = 4x ds lkis { k js [ kk y = x + 1 dh fLFkfr crkb,A

(9) ijoy; y 2 = 4x dh thok x + y = 2 dk e/; fcUnq Kkr dhft,A

(12) ukHkh; thok dh yEckbZ Kkr dhft, ftldk ,d fljk t gks A

(iii) fcUnq (at², 2at) ij t y = x + a t².

uks V : fcUnq v ks a t 1 vkS j t 2 ij Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dk iz f rPNs n fcUnq ( at 1t 2 , a(t 1 + t 2) ) gks r k gS A

vfHkyEc dk lehdj.k Li'kZ js [ kk dh iz o .krk ls iz k Ir fd;k tk ldrk gS A

(21) fl) dhft, fd ijoy; y 2 = 4ax dh thok ftldk lehdj.k y – x 2 + 4a 2 = 0 gS ] oØ dk

Li'khZ ;q X e (Pair of Tangents) :

mnkgj.k # 14 : ;fn fcUnq P ls y 2 = 4ax ij [kha p h xbZ Li'kZ js [ kkvks a dh iz o .krk,¡

Li'kZ thok (Chord of Contact) :

egRoiw.kZ fcUnq (Im portant Hig hlights) :

nh?kZ o` Ù k dk ekud lehdj.k %

= 2 e .(ukfHk dh mlds la xr fu;rk ls nw j h)

lgk;d o` Ù k / mRds U nz h ; dks . k :( Auxiliary Circle / Eccentric Angle )

iz k pfyd fu:i.k (Parametric Representation) :